EN_Product overview_Commercial_Catering

EN_Product overview_Commercial_Catering_2022

OUR RANGE
SHELVING SYSTEMS
TRANSPORT TROLLEYS
EURO CONTAINER LOGISTICS
STACKING DEVICES
MOBILE BAIN MARIE
FOOD TRANSPORT TROLLEY
ISOBOX® FOOD TRANSPORT TROLLEY
MOBIS® BUFFETCARTS
KÖHLER® BANQUET TROLLEYS
TRAY TRANSPORT CART
FOOD DISTRIBUTION
FOOD DISTRIBUTION WITH CONVEYOR TECHNOLOGY
CONVEYOR TECHNOLOGY
BUILT-IN APPLIANCES FOR FOOD SERVING COUNTERS
FURNITURE AND FIXTURES
HYGIENE RANGE
COMMERCIAL KITCHEN ACCESSORIES

OUR RANGE P. 8 P. 50 P. 100 Shelving systems P. 108 Stacking equipment P. 148 1 4 7 2 Transport trolleys Euro container logistics P. 130 P. 140 5 Mobile bain maries Food transport trolleys P. 158 P. 162 8 ISOBOX® food transport trolley Mobis® Buffetcarts Köhler® banquet trolleys P. 168 P. 172 P. 178 10 11 Tray transport carts Food distribution Food distribution with conveyor system P. 196 P. 206 P. 218 13 Conveyor systems Built-in appliances for food serving counters P. 224 P. 228 16 Hygiene range Accessories for commercial kitchens 14 17 Furniture and fixtures 33 6 9 12 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Our most successful product is customer satisfaction Our success story began with metalworking and wire mesh production, and we have added many exciting new chapters to it over the years. Our philosophy and actions have always been determined by our understanding of quality, our instinctive grasp of precision and our aspiration to always offer the best possible solutions. We have continually grown along with the challenges and expectations of our customers. Today, Hupfer is a specialist in kitchen logistics, sterile supplies logistics and general goods transport, offering bespoke “Made in Germany” concepts appreciated by more and more customers around the world. 4

Outstanding quality down to the finest detail Quality is our unmistakable trademark, from mate- rial and workmanship right through to functionality, safety, service and punctual delivery. We ensure this with our state-of-the-art planning and manu- facturing technology, carefully chosen suppliers and partners, and comprehensive quality assurance. But above all it is our highly trained employees who characterise the Hupfer brand. From devel- opment to delivery, they build every product using their expertise and craftsmanship, ensuring Hupfer quality right down to the last detail. High-quality materials, high-quality workmanship It is not only the high-quality stainless steel surfaces of our transport carts, but also the indi- vidual built-in parts that are in many cases entirely rust-free. Stainless steel products are particu- larly durable and therefore economical in use. One important benefit of this, especially when used in the kitchen environment, is that stainless steel surfaces remain permanently smooth and even, making them advantageous from a hygiene perspective. 5

Your partner for kitchen logistics At Hupfer, we develop our products and systems based on a deep understanding of the logistical structures and individual requirements of commercial kitchens. As a kitchen logistics specialist, we offer holistic concepts for reliable processes and optimal workflows. Transporting food safely, reliably keeping it hot or cold, distributing it efficiently: our proven solutions fulfil these logistics functions and many more with distinction. With decades of experience, in-depth knowledge of the industry and comprehensive solutions, we support planners, specialist dealers and users, so that everyone involved can be sure that they can achieve the goals we all share: true customer satisfaction right up to consumption, combined with cost-effectiveness and compliance with hygiene and safety requirements. 6 ORGANISING PREPARING TRANSPORTING STORING SERVING REGENERATING KEEPING COLD KEEPING HOT DISTRIBUTING

OUR PROMISE – EFFICIENT FOOD PERFORMANCE – EFFICIENT FOOD SERVICE Inspire your guests with state-of-the-art food presentation. Take a look at the optimum commercial and ergonomic solutions for this! 3 STARS FOR THE TAKE-AWAY MARKET Whether it’s in a company canteen, a dining room, a hotel restaurant or a hospital, the consistent implementation of our Efficient Food Performance approach during the development of our solu- tions means we can offer operators and planners functionality, safety and efficiency at the highest level. The attractive presentation of dishes and the gentle regeneration process ensure that guests are satisfied. Functionality Safe regeneration, keeping food hot and cold, mobility and precise preparation in all processes with the strictest ergonomic requirements. Safety Optimum food presentation at serving points while adhering to hygiene, temperature and work safety regulations. Efficiency Minimum energy usage with maximum equipment durability while optimising staff deployment. 4 SPECIALISTS FOR THE ENTIRE VALUE CREATION CHAIN “Efficient Food Performance” represents the quality and performance promised by the Hupfer, Rüther, MenüMobil and Trak brands with their harmonised solutions that range from reliable regeneration processes, efficient kitchen logistics and food distribution to attractive serving points. High-quality solutions for safe, efficient and ergonomic work processes in commercial kitchens. State-of-the-art serving points for perfect food presentation and the convenient provision and dispensing of meals. Holistic systems for meal distribution in hospitals, care homes and meals- Customised crockery return systems and individual meal presentation. on-wheels. 7

1 1 – SHELVING SYSTEMS Complete Flexibility The dimensions of the uprights and shelves are optimally matched so that the shelving systems can be flexibly combined with each other. Stainless steel Norm 5 Norm 25 Norm 35 Our bestseller Our best value option Our powerhouse Stainless steel louvred shelf NEW NEW NEW Stainless steel wired shelf Stainless steel solid shelf P. 18 Stainless steel solid shelf Stainless steel wired shelf Stainless steel solid shelf P. 20 P. 22 Aluminium/polymer Norm 12 Norm 20 Our latest shelving range Overview p.16 Our washer friendly range Our strong lightweight performer Polymer louvred shelf Polymer solid shelf Aluminium louvred shelf Aluminium solid shelf P. 24 8 P. 26 NEW Website Further product details

1 L e a d i n g s h e l v i n g m a n u f a c t u r e r f o r o v e r 5 0 y e a r s Stationary shelving elements Our stationary shelving elements for shelving just how you want it. P. 28 t o 1 0 0 % U p m o r e s t o r a g e s p a c e Easy Rider systems Our shelving systems fitted as Easy Rider systems optimise space utilisation and costs (except Norm 35). Space problems? Not anymore! P. 34 Shelving accessories Our special shelves and useful accessories for your requirements. P. 36 Mobile shelving Our mobile shelving gives you flexibility for delivery, storage and cleaning. Wall shelving Individually tailored shelf dimensions and types for your specific needs. P. 42 P. 48 9

1 INTRODUCTION TO OUR SHELVING RANGES Comparison of solid shelves 1,300 mm Maximum load Price Norm 12 Norm 20 Norm 5 Norm 25 Norm 35 Aluminium/ polymer 100 € Aluminium Stainless steel, various grades 150 €€ 150 €€€ 100 €€ 250 €€€€ Basis: basic shelving unit including 4 solid shelves. Dry store Cold room Deep-freeze room Production kitchen Kitchen Unpackaged saltwater fish storage Except stainless steel shelves Further applications Advice available at any time WHY HUPFER? Large selection, readily available Thanks to our large warehouse, we are able to pre-produce many product variants in large quantities, so that your desired product reaches you as quickly as possible. Efficient delivery logistics Your order is packaged in bundles for each assembly location, for example, cold store, thereby enabling direct allocation and rapid assembly. Top quality High-quality materials and first-class workmanship guarantee lasting enjoyment of our products. Acceptance drawing in 24 hours Thanks to our internal shelf configu- rator, we can send you a final accept- ance drawing within 24 hours. Wide range of products We have many different uprights and shelves, in various materials and with various accessories – for an exact fit in your room. Assembly could not be easier Our shelving systems can be assembled with basic tools and no prior knowl- edge. However, if required, we are also happy to organise an assembly team. 10

Time saves money: success through good planning Taking the time to plan your layout in advance can save not only a lot of trouble later on, but also money. Storage space in general, and cold rooms in particular, are extremely expensive. Saving space here always pays off in the long run. Even small things, such as the position of the door in the room, make all the difference in the end – optimally designing your storage space can ensure a much more efficient and ergonomic workflow. 1 1 , r e g n a h c x e t a e H i g n g n a h ! ! Note: Consider the clear- ance under the heat exchanger for all cold and deep- freeze rooms. 4,000 mm , r e g n a h c x e t a e H i g n g n a h ! , r e g n a h c x e t a e H i g n g n a h , r e g n a h c x e t a e H i g n g n a h ! ! 2,500 mm 2,500 mm Reaching our destination together We use our long-standing expertise to support you from planning to installation. Provide us with a description of your spatial conditions and we will configure an optimal shelving system for you and present it to you in the form of a visual drawing. Our tips & tricks for you Thanks to the knowledge we have built up over many years, we have developed a great deal of expertise, which we are happy to share. Just get in touch! m m 0 0 0 , 3 2,500 mm 2,500 mm All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 11 11

1 The principle The basic and extension unit For each basic shelving unit set up individu- ally, you always need two uprights. For an extension unit, only one additional upright is needed. 1 2 1 2 3 The cross brace All uprights are prepared for attachment of a cross brace, if required, but not every shelving section requires a cross brace: Construction – a simple explanation Scan for the basics of shelf construction: 1-2 shelving sections: 1 cross brace 3+ shelving sections: 1 cross brace for every 3 shelving sections Double shelf unit For back-to-back assembly, the uprights are bolted together, meaning that a cross brace is not required for each shelving section. In this case, one cross brace is sufficient for two shelving sections. Bay load/section load The bay load is the evenly distrib- uted load on a single shelf. The sum of the total bay loads of a shelving section gives the section load, which must not be exceeded. The right-angle construction The right-angle construction requires corner hooks (2 per shelf) – see accessories. This means that no additional uprights are required. Individual uprights and shelves can be found under “Stationary shelving elements”. Norm 35 cannot be used as a right-angle shelf. Example of shelf constructions 12

Effective shelf dimensions – a simple explanation 1 The shelving unit widths given relate to the widths of our shelves. These dimensions change when shelving units are combined with each other, as extension units or right-angle units. In this case, one or two fewer uprights are needed. Corner hooks In case of a right-angle shelf extension, the shelving units are connected to each other with the help of corner hooks. The hooks of the different shelving systems are of different sizes. In each shelving system, a different pitch is created and the actual shelving width is reduced accordingly. Reduced dimension when using corner hooks Norm 5: Norm 25: Norm 12: Norm 20: Norm 35: Right-angle extension not possible less 23 mm less 23 mm less 6 mm less 25 mm Effective shelf dimension The shelf lugs are fixed to the bolts on the uprights – the usable shelf surface is therefore smaller: Shelf width: Shelf depth: less 60 mm less 70 mm Effective upright height The actual upright height can be up to 100 mm shorter. Quoted shelf width = total shelf width ) e c a r b s s o r c m m 0 1 r o f ( d e t o u Q = h t p e d f l e h s h t p e d f l e h s l a t o t = t i n u n o i s n e t x e e g a r e v A h t d w i f l e h s s t n o i j r e n r o c f o n o i t c u d e d x 2 – e l g n a - t h g R i t i n u g n i v l e h s n o i t c u d e d t n o i j r e n r o c x 1 – h t d w i f l e h S Basic shelving unit Extension unit r o f ( m m 0 1 ) e c a r b s s o r c Extension unit = shelf width –1 upright (25 mm) 13

1 COMPARISON OF DIFFERENT SHELVING CONFIGURATIONS Not all shelving is the same! Comprehensive preparation will ensure that you find the ideal shelving for your requirements. Which construction method is the most appropriate? What is the best way to use the existing space? If the initial conditions are clear, expensive mistakes can be avoided. INDIVIDUAL SHELVING UNITS Basis for calculation Cold room Deep-freeze room UTILISED AREA: 42% STORAGE AREA: 147 m2 PRICE/m2: €€ TOTAL LOAD: 10,200 kg FLEXIBILITY: medium Individual shelving units are characterised by relatively low purchase costs and particularly simple assembly. They also have a higher load capacity than extension units. EXTENSION UNITS Cold room Deep-freeze room UTILISED AREA: 44% STORAGE AREA: 150 m2 PRICE/m2: € TOTAL LOAD: 9,600 kg FLEXIBILITY: low Clever savings: the extension system eliminates the need for an additional upright. Four uprights are required for two shelving sections with single shelves – with extension units, only three uprights are needed. 14 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

1 E X A M P L E C A L C U L A T I O N MOBILE SHELVING Cold room Deep-freeze room UTILISED AREA: 34% STORAGE AREA: 120 m2 PRICE/m2: €€€ TOTAL LOAD: 2,800 kg FLEXIBILITY: high Mobile shelving gives you even more flexibility in your storage areas, as goods can be rolled directly into storage upon delivery and on to the production kitchen without repacking. Mobile shelving also means even higher levels of hygiene as both the storage areas and the shelving units themselves can be fully cleaned thanks to their easy mobility. The perfect combination: many of our customers rely on the proven combination of stationary and mobile shelving. EASY RIDER SYSTEM Cold room Deep-freeze room STORAGE AREA: 180 m2 UTILISED AREA: 52% PRICE/m2: €€€ TOTAL LOAD: 13,800 kg FLEXIBILITY: low Our Easy Rider systems provide the ideal solution wherever the available space does not, at first glance, offer the required storage area, efficiently using the space available and increasing the usable area. Basis for calculation: Uprights and shelves: Norm 5 stainless steel 4 shelves per shelving section Note: All figures are approximate and refer to an example calculation. Many other shelf configurations are possible. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 15

1 OUR TOP INNOVATIONS AT A GLANCE 1 STRONG PERFORMANCE WITH WIDTH UP TO 1,500 mm Although the majority of our shelves have always been able to handle a bay load of 150 kg, the solid shelves of our best-selling Norm 5 and Norm 20 units can now also handle a 150 kg bay load consistently up to a width of 1,500 mm. And the maximum section load for our 1,800 mm and 2,000 mm high uprights is now also 1,200 kg (excludes Norm 25). 2 SUSTAINABILITY The materials used in our shelving units can be completely separated and fully recycled. We are already using approximately 85% recycled materials. 3 B U Y - B A C K G U A R A N T E E VALUE. STABLE. Hupfer shelving is made of high-quality materials that are still valuable at the end of their useful life: they are the hidden treasure of a commercial kitchen. Hupfer offers to buy back your shelving at the per-kilo price of the recyclable material on the buy-back day.1 1 Please see our current buy-back conditions. These can be found at: uk.hupfer.com/en/. 16

4 WE LOVE EURO CONTAINERS Fits like a glove. The new 700 and 1,300 mm shelf widths are perfectly matched to the standard dimensions of Euro containers (600 × 400 mm). Please also use the corre- sponding shelf depth of 400 or 600 mm. 1 1 NEW FEATURES for our solid stainless steel and aluminium shelves: 6 7 STRONG SUPPORTING LUG The optimised lug shape increases stability and prevents buckling. 5 LOGO! Our solid shelves are now stylishly embossed with our logo on each side. STABLE SUPPORT BAR For wider shelves, the pre-assembled support bar provides perfect stability for our solid shelves. 8 NEW EDGING Not only does it look good, the optimised edging on shelves wider than 1,000 mm gives a higher geometric moment of inertia. The result: maximum stability. 17 17

1 NORM 5 – STAINLESS STEEL When nothing but the best will do? The Norm 5 shelf has the highest material quality offering maximum robustness, toughness and extreme durability. Website Further product details Shelf type Solid shelf Louvred shelf Wired shelf Width mm 600-1,500 600-1,500 600-1,500 Bay load with equal load distribution in kg 150 150 150 Stainless steel uprights Norm 5 Maximum bay load Shelving unit height in mm 600 kg section load 1,200 kg section load kg 150 150 1,200 1,400 1,600 1,800 2,000 SHELVING MODULES UPRIGHTS, see stationary shelving elements from p. 28. SHELVES, see stationary shelving elements from p. 29. CROSS BRACES as accessories for systems with 4+ uprights, see explanation on p. 32. CORNER HOOKS for right-angle construction, see accessories on p. 37. SPECIAL SHELVES, OTHER OPTIONS see accessories on p. 38. We are happy to help you with the planning. 18 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

EXAMPLE OF COMPLETE SHELVING SYSTEMS Further dimensions available on our website. 1 Norm 5 stationary shelving unit – incl. 4 solid shelves* Shelving unit height 1,800 mm Total width mm 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 up to 6,000 Upright depth 300 mm Upright depth 400 mm Upright depth 500 mm Upright depth 600 mm 01600318B 01700318B 01800318B 01900318B 011000318B 011200318B 011300318B 011400318B 011500318B 01600418B 01700418B 01800418B 01900418B 011000418B 011200418B 011300418B 011400418B 011500418B 01600518B 01700518B 01800518B 01900518B 011000518B 011200518B 011300518B 011400518B 011500518B 01600618B 01700618B 01800618B 01900618B 011000618B 011200618B 011300618B 011400618B 011500618B For ease, further lengths can be found in 100 mm increments on our website and in the shelving price list. Norm 5 stationary shelving unit – incl. 4 wired shelves* Shelving unit height 1,800 mm Total width mm 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 up to 6,000 Upright depth 300 mm Upright depth 400 mm Upright depth 500 mm Upright depth 600 mm 01600318R 01700318R 01800318R 01900318R 011000318R 011200318R 011300318R 011400318R 011500318R 01600418R 01700418R 01800418R 01900418R 011000418R 011200418R 011300418R 011400418R 011500418R 01600518R 01700518R 01800518R 01900518R 011000518R 011200518R 011300518R 011400518R 011500518R For ease, further lengths can be found in 100 mm increments on our website and in the shelving price list. 01600618R 01700618R 01800618R 01900618R 011000618R 011200618R 011300618R 011400618R 011500618R Norm 5 stationary shelving unit – incl. 4 louvred shelves* Shelving unit height 1,800 mm Total width mm 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 up to 6,000 Upright depth 300 mm Upright depth 400 mm Upright depth 500 mm Upright depth 600 mm 01600318G 01700318G 01800318G 01900318G 011000318G 011200318G 011300318G 011400318G 011500318G 01600418G 01700418G 01800418G 01900418G 011000418G 011200418G 011300418G 011400418G 011500418G 01600518G 01700518G 01800518G 01900518G 011000518G 011200518G 011300418G 011400518G 011500518G 01600618G 01700618G 01800618G 01900618G 011000618G 011200618G 011300618G 011400618G 011500618G For ease, further lengths can be found in 100 mm increments on our website and in the shelving price list. *General notes: Pitch 150 mm. The effective shelf depth is 70 mm less than the quoted upright depth. The effective shelf width is 60 mm less than the quoted total width. The effective upright height can vary by up to ±100 mm. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 19

1 NORM 25 – STAINLESS STEEL Superior quality. Our Norm 25 shelves are made entirely of a magnetic and rustproof stainless steel alloy. This means you can simply label your goods using a magnet. An attractive solution. Shelf type Solid shelf Width mm 700-1,000 1,200-1,300 Bay load with equal load distribution in kg 150 100 Stainless steel uprights Norm 25 Maximum bay load 600 kg section load kg 150 Shelving unit height in mm 1,800 SHELVING MODULES UPRIGHTS, see stationary shelving elements from p. 28. SHELVES, see stationary shelving elements from p. 29. CROSS BRACES as accessories for systems with 4+ uprights, see explanation on p. 32. CORNER HOOKS for right-angle construction, see accessories on p. 37. SPECIAL SHELVES, OTHER OPTIONS see accessories on p. 38. We are happy to help you with the planning. 20 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

EXAMPLE OF COMPLETE SHELVING SYSTEMS Further dimensions available on our website. 1 Norm 25 stationary shelving unit – incl. 4 solid shelves* Shelving unit height 1,800 mm Total width mm 700 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 Upright depth 500 mm 01700518BL25 01900518BL25 Upright depth 600 mm 01700618BL25 01900618BL25 011.000518BL25 011.000618BL25 011.200518BL25 011.200618BL25 011.300518BL25 011.300618BL25 up to 5,500 For ease, further lengths can be found in 100 mm increments on our website and in the shelving price list. Practical The labels for your stored goods can be attached quickly and simply using a magnet on the shelf. *General notes: Pitch 150 mm. The effective shelf depth is 70 mm less than the quoted upright depth. The effective shelf width is 60 mm less than the quoted total width. The effective upright height can vary by up to ±100 mm. Website Further dimensions 21 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

1 NORM 35 – STAINLESS STEEL Our load carrier – Norm 35 is used in places where heavy goods need to be stored. Special highlight: thanks to the reliable stability provided by lateral bracing bars, the Norm 35 shelving unit can be used from both sides with no cross brace to get in the way. Website Further product details Shelf type Solid shelf Wired shelf Width mm 900-1,300 900-1,300 Bay load with equal load distribution in kg 250 250 Stainless steel uprights Norm 35 Maximum bay load Shelving unit height in mm 2,000 kg section load kg 250 1,800 2,000 SHELVING MODULES UPRIGHTS, see stationary shelving elements from p. 28. SHELVES see stationary shelving elements from p. 29. BRACING BARS 4 per shelving section, see accessories on p. 37. ALTERNATIVE: CROSS BRACES for each shelving section, see accessories on p. 32. SPECIAL SHELVES, OTHER OPTIONS see accessories on p. 38. We are happy to help you with the planning. 22 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

EXAMPLE OF COMPLETE SHELVING SYSTEMS Further dimensions available on our website. 1 Norm 35 stationary shelving unit – incl. 4 solid shelves* Shelving unit height 1,800 mm Total width mm Upright depth 510 mm Upright depth 610 mm 900 1,000 1,300 0190051018B 0190061018B 01100051018B 01100061018B 01130051018B 01130061018B Norm 35 stationary shelving unit – incl. 4 wired shelves* Shelving unit height 1,800 mm Total width mm Upright depth 510 mm Upright depth 610 mm 900 1,000 1,300 0190051018R 0190061018R 01100051018R 01100061018R 01130051018R 01130061018R Loading from both sides Thanks to the stability of the shelving units provided by the bracing bars, no cross brace is required. This means you can use the shelving from both sides – a practical feature. *General notes: Pitch 150 mm. The effective shelf depth is 70 mm less than the quoted upright depth. The effective shelf width is 60 mm less than the quoted total width. The effective upright height can vary by up to ±100 mm. Website Further dimensions 23 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

1 NORM 12 – ALUMINIUM/POLYMER Washer Friendly The polymer shelves can be easily lifted out and cleaned in a washing device. The support bars remain on the shelving unit. Cleaning made easy. Shelf type Solid polymer shelf, louvred shelf Width mm 600-1,000 1,200 1,300-1,500 Bay load with equal load distribution in kg 200 160 100 Aluminium uprights Norm 12 Maximum bay load Shelving unit height in mm 600 kg section load 1,200 kg section load kg 200 200 1,200 1,400 1,600 1,800 2,000 1,800 2,000 SHELVING MODULES UPRIGHTS, see stationary shelving elements from p. 28. SHELVES, see stationary shelving elements from p. 29. CROSS BRACES as accessories for systems with 4+ uprights, see explanation on p. 32. CORNER HOOKS for right- angle construction, see accessories on p. 37. SPECIAL SHELVES, OTHER OPTIONS see accessories on p. 38. We are happy to help you with the planning. 24 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

600 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 up to 6,000 06600418BL 06800418BL 06900418BL 061000418BL 061200418BL 061300418BL 061400418BL 061500418BL Upright depth 500 mm 06600518BL 06800518BL 06900518BL 061000518BL 061200518BL 061300518BL 061400518BL 061500518BL Upright depth 600 mm 06600618BL 06800618BL 06900618BL 061000618BL 061200618BL 061300618BL 061400618BL 061500618BL EXAMPLE OF COMPLETE SHELVING SYSTEMS Further dimensions available on our website. 1 Norm 12 stationary shelving unit – incl. 4 solid polymer shelves* Shelving unit height 1,800 mm Total width mm Upright depth 400 mm For ease, further lengths can be found in 100 mm increments on our website and in the shelving price list. Norm 12 stationary shelving unit – incl. 4 louvred shelves* Shelving unit height 1,800 mm Total width mm 600 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 up to 6,000 Upright depth 400 mm 06600418RL 06800418RL 06900418RL 061000418RL 061200418RL 061300418RL 061400418RL 061500418RL Upright depth 500 mm 06600518RL 06800518RL 06900518RL 061000518RL 061200518RL 061300518RL 061400518RL 061500518RL Upright depth 600 mm 06600618RL 06800618RL 06900618RL 061000618RL 061200618RL 061300618RL 061400618RL 061500618RL For ease, further lengths can be found in 100 mm increments on our website and in the shelving price list. *General notes: Pitch 150 mm. The effective shelf depth is 70 mm less than the quoted upright depth. The effective shelf width is 60 mm less than the quoted total width. The effective upright height can vary by up to ±100 mm. Website Further dimensions 25 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

1 NORM 20 – ALUMINIUM An all-rounder – the Norm 20 stationary shelv- ing unit. Whether it’s vegetables, meat, dairy products or even drinks, this unit does it all. The various shelves and accessories make this unit very popular, including for dry stores. Website Further product details Shelf type Solid aluminium shelf Width mm 600-1,500 Aluminium louvred shelf 600-1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400-1,500 Bay load with equal load distribution in kg 150 200 160 150 100 Aluminium uprights Norm 12 Maximum bay load Shelving unit height in mm kg 200 200 1,200 1,400 1,600 1,800 2,000 1,800 2,000 600 kg section load 1,200 kg section load SHELVING MODULES UPRIGHTS, see stationary shelving elements from p. 28. SHELVES, see stationary shelving elements from p. 29. CROSS BRACES as accessories for systems with 4+ uprights, see explanation on p. 32. CORNER HOOKS for right-angle construction, see accessories on p. 37. SPECIAL SHELVES, OTHER OPTIONS see accessories on p. 38. We are happy to help you with the planning. 26 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

EXAMPLE OF COMPLETE SHELVING SYSTEMS Further dimensions available on our website. 1 Norm 20 stationary shelving unit – incl. 4 solid aluminium shelves* Shelving unit height 1,800 mm Total width mm Upright depth 400 mm Upright depth 500 mm Upright depth 600 mm 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 02600418B 02700418B 02800418B 02900418B 021000418B 021200418B 021300418B 021400418B 021500418B 02600518B 02700518B 02800518B 02900518B 021000518B 021200518B 021300518B 021400518B 021500518B 02600618B 02700618B 02800618B 02900618B 021000618B 021200618B 021300618B 021400618B 021500618B up to 6,000 For ease, further lengths can be found in 100 mm increments on our website and in the shelving price list. Norm 20 stationary shelving unit – incl. 4 louvred aluminium shelves* Shelving unit height 1,800 mm Total width mm Upright depth 400 mm Upright depth 500 mm Upright depth 600 mm 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 02600418R 02700418R 02800418R 02900418R 021000418R 021200418R 021300418R 021400418R 021500418R 02600518R 02700518R 02800518R 02900518R 021000518R 021200518R 021300518R 021400518R 021500518R 02600618R 02700620R 02800618R 02900618R 021000618R 021200618R 021300618R 021400618R 021500618R up to 6,000 For ease, further lengths can be found in 100 mm increments on our website and in the shelving price list. *General notes: Pitch 150 mm. The effective shelf depth is 70 mm less than the quoted upright depth. The effective shelf width is 60 mm less than the quoted total width. The effective upright height can vary by up to ±100 mm. Website Further dimensions 27 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

1 STATIONARY SHELVING ELEMENTS Website Further product details UPRIGHTS Aluminium Norm 12/20 – uprights with max. section load of 600 kg Model Height mm 1,200 1,400 1,600 1,800 2,000 Upright depth 300 mm* Upright depth 400 mm Upright depth 500 mm Upright depth 600 mm 0201007 0201077 0201147 0201217 0201287 0201017 0201087 0201157 0201227 0201297 0201037 0201107 0201177 0201247 0201317 0201047 0201117 0201187 0201257 0201327 Aluminium uprights: special square tube set 25 × 25 mm. Integrated support lugs at 150 mm intervals. Height-adjustable screw feet to compensate for unevenness in the floor surface up to 25 mm. * Not suitable for Norm 12. Aluminium Norm 12/20 – uprights with max. section load of 1,200 kg Model Height mm 1,800 Upright depth 400 mm Upright depth 500 mm Upright depth 600 mm 0201225 0201245 0201255 2,000 0201295 0201315 0201325 Aluminium uprights: special square tube set 25 × 25 mm. Integrated support lugs at 150 mm intervals. Height-adjustable screw feet to compensate for unevenness in the floor surface up to 25 mm. Stainless steel Norm 5 – uprights with max. section load of 600 kg Model Height mm 1,200 1,400 1,600 Upright depth 300 mm Upright depth 400 mm Upright depth 500 mm Upright depth 600 mm 0101007 0101077 0101147 0101017 0101087 0101157 0101037 0101107 0101177 0101047 0101117 0101187 Stainless steel uprights: special square tube set 25 × 25 mm. Fully welded shelving bolts Ø 7 mm at intervals of 150 mm. Height-adjustable screw feet to compensate for unevenness in the floor surface up to 25 mm. Stainless steel Norm 5 – uprights with max. section load of 1,200 kg Model Height mm Upright depth 300 mm Upright depth 400 mm Upright depth 500 mm Upright depth 600 mm 1,800 0101215 0101225 0101245 0101255 2,000 0101285 0101295 0101315 0101325 Stainless steel uprights: special square tube set 25 × 25 mm. Fully welded shelving bolts Ø 7 mm at intervals of 150 mm. Height-adjustable screw feet to compensate for unevenness in the floor surface up to 25 mm. 28 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

Stainless steel Norm 25 – uprights with max. section load of 600 kg 1 Model Height mm Upright depth 500 mm Upright depth 600 mm 1,800 0137004 0137005 Stainless steel uprights: special square tube set 25 × 25 mm. Height-adjustable screw feet to compensate for unevenness in the floor surface up to 25 mm. Stainless steel Norm 35 – uprights with max. section load of 2,000 kg Model Height mm 1,800 Upright depth 510 mm 0126002 2,000 0126042 Upright depth 610 mm 0126012 0126052 Right-angle construction not possible. Stainless steel uprights: Square tube sets 30 × 30 mm. Two loose hanging rail supports (supplied) per upright can be hooked on flexibly. Height-adjustable screw feet to compensate for unevenness in the floor surface up to 25 mm. General notes: Upright pitch: 150 mm. The effective upright height can be up to 100 mm shorter. Bay loads for the shelves can be found in the relevant section. SHELVES Aluminium Norm 20: Solid shelf Model Width mm 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 For upright depth For upright depth For upright depth For upright depth 300 mm 0202432 0202522 0202502 0202572 0202642 0202712 0202762 0202782 0202852 400 mm 0202442 0202552 0202512 0202582 0202652 0202722 0202772 0202792 0202862 500 mm 0202462 0202562 0202532 0202602 0202672 0202742 0202802 0202812 0202882 600 mm 0202472 0202592 0202542 0202612 0202682 0202752 0202832 0202822 0202892 Bevelled along long and front sides. Additional reinforced bar for long lengths. Increased stability due to lug embossing. Increased rigidity due to side profiling. Embossed logo on both sides. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 29

1 Aluminium Norm 20: Louvred shelf Model Width mm 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 For upright depth For upright depth For upright depth For upright depth 300 mm 0201532 0201522 0201602 0201672 0201742 0201812 0201862 0201882 0201952 400 mm 0201542 0201552 0201612 0201682 0201752 0201822 0201872 0201892 0201962 500 mm 0201562 0201582 0201632 0201702 0201772 0201842 0201902 0201912 0201982 600 mm 0201572 0201592 0201642 0201712 0201782 0201852 0201932 0201922 0201992 Louvred shelf made of aluminium bracing bars with seamlessly compressed crosswise 20 × 7 mm rectangular tubes spaced at 30 mm. Polymer Norm 12: Solid shelf Model Width mm 600 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 For upright depth For upright depth For upright depth 400 mm 0602449 0602519 0602589 0602659 0602729 0602349 0602799 0602869 500 mm 0602469 0602539 0602609 0602679 0602749 0602369 0602819 0602889 600 mm 0602479 0602549 0602619 0602689 0602759 0602379 0602829 0602899 Version with polystyrene segments on aluminium support bars. Polymer Norm 12: Louvred shelf Model Width mm 600 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 For upright depth For upright depth For upright depth 400 mm 0601549 0601619 0601689 0601759 0601829 0601349 0601899 0601969 500 mm 0601569 0601639 0601709 0601779 0601849 0601369 0601919 0601989 600 mm 0601579 0601649 0601719 0601789 0601859 0601379 0601929 0601999 Version with polystyrene segments with perforation 75 × 25 mm on aluminium support bars. Stainless steel Norm 5: Solid shelf Model Width mm 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 For upright depth For upright depth For upright depth For upright depth 300 mm 0102432 0102522 0102502 0102572 0102642 0102712 0102732 0102782 0102852 400 mm 0102442 0102552 0102512 0102582 0102652 0102722 0102762 0102792 0102862 500 mm 0102462 0102562 0102532 0102602 0102672 0102742 0102772 0102812 0102882 600 mm 0102472 0102592 0102542 0102612 0102682 0102752 0102872 0102822 0102892 Bevelled along long and front sides. Reinforced bar at 1,500 mm width. Increased stability due to lug embossing. Increased rigidity due to side profiling. Embossed logo on both sides. 30 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

Stainless steel Norm 5: Louvred shelf 1 Model Width mm 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 For upright depth For upright depth For upright depth For upright depth 300 mm 0101537 0101527 0101607 0101677 0101747 0101817 0101867 0101887 0101957 400 mm 0101547 0101557 0101617 0101687 0101757 0101827 0101877 0101897 0101967 500 mm 0101567 0101587 0101637 0101707 0101777 0101847 0101937 0101917 0101987 600 mm 0101577 0101597 0101647 0101717 0101787 0101857 0101947 0101927 0101997 Stainless steel louvred shelf made of 0.8 mm sheet metal, with burr-free 40 or 49 mm edges on the long side, 37 mm on the front side. Deep-pressed, approx. 32 mm wide slots spaced at 50 mm. Stainless steel Norm 5: Wired shelf Model Width mm 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 For upright depth For upright depth For upright depth For upright depth 300 mm 0101532 0101522 0101602 0101672 0101742 0101812 0101862 0101882 0101952 400 mm 0101542 0101552 0101612 0101682 0101752 0101822 0101872 0101892 0101962 500 mm 0101562 0101582 0101632 0101702 0101772 0101842 0101932 0101912 0101982 600 mm 0101572 0101592 0101642 0101712 0101782 0101852 0101942 0101922 0101992 Electro-polished, stainless steel wired shelf, made of 35 × 10 × 3.0 mm or 41 × 8 × 3 mm longitudinal angle sections. Crosswise Ø 3.5 mm wires welded in between with spacing of 25 mm and reinforced bars made from flat bars and wire. Stainless steel Norm 25: Solid shelf Model Width mm 700 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 For upright depth 500 mm 0137016 0137046 0137076 0137106 0137136 0137126 For upright depth 600 mm 0137026 0137056 0137086 0137116 0137146 0137210 Bevelled along long and front sides. Reinforced bar for long lengths. Increased stability due to lug embossing. Increased rigidity due to side profiling. Embossed logo on both sides. Stainless steel Norm 35: Solid shelf Model Width mm 900 1,000 1,300 For upright depth 510 mm 0126342 0126382 0126462 For upright depth 610 mm 0126352 0126392 0126472 Right-angle construction not possible. Bevelled along long and front sides. Including reinforced bar. Increased stability due to lug embossing. Increased rigidity due to side profiling. Embossed logo on both sides. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 31

1 Stainless steel Norm 35: Wired shelf Model Width mm 900 1,000 1,300 For upright depth 510 mm 0126142 0126182 0126262 For upright depth 610 mm 0126152 0126192 0126272 Right-angle construction not possible. Electro-polished, stainless steel wired shelf, made of 41 × 8 × 3 mm longitudinal angle sections. Crosswise Ø 4.0 mm wires welded in between with spacing of 25 mm and 39 × 3 mm reinforced bars made from flat bars. General notes: The effective shelf depth is 70 mm less than the quoted upright depth. The effective shelf width is 60 mm less than the quoted total width. CROSS BRACES Cross brace Model Suitable for Product code Aluminium cross brace Stainless steel cross brace Stainless steel cross brace Norm 12, 20 Norm 5, 25 Norm 35 Stainless steel cross brace for back-to-back assembly Norm 5, 12, 20, 25 Adjustable to all shelf widths. 0203062 0103072 0126602 0103082 32 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

1 EASY RIDER SYSTEMS Website Further product details t o 1 0 0 % U p m o r e s t o r a g e s p a c e Easy Rider systems – an investment that always pays off The mobility of the Easy Rider systems gives you the flexibility to create up to 100% more shelf space with the same room size! This large space saving makes an Easy Rider system worthwhile in all cases – despite the higher initial investment costs. Cold rooms in particular are extremely expensive, so optimum use of space has a real cash value. Easy Rider systems Stationary shelving units You can use the various stationary Norm 5, 25, 12 and 20 shelving elements (uprights and shelves) to create your own individual Easy Rider system. These can then simply be mounted onto Easy Rider floor rails, which do not need fixing to the floor and require no special tools, to become mobile. The rails allow the shelves to be moved safely and easily. An Easy Rider system generally consists of the following minimum components: 1. Uprights and shelves, cross braces (see stationary shelving elements p. 28) 2. 2 Easy Rider floor rails 3. 4 Easy Rider floor rail end stops 4. 2 Easy Rider roller chassis 5. 1 Horizontal cross brace for connecting the Easy Rider roller chassis The Easy Rider system can be extended up to the following maximum dimensions: Three shelving sections side by side Max. total width 3,600 mm Max. load per running unit 2,000 kg Aisle width: min. 750 mm, max. 1,000 mm 34

Easy Rider floor rail 1 Dimensions D × H mm Product code Flat design means they are easy for standard transport trolleys to cross. 160 × 17 0120810 Stainless steel version. Specially profiled Easy Rider floor rail to accommodate the trolleys. Simple use: it can be placed on the ground without a screw connection. Standard designs with widths of 1,000 mm, 1,500 mm and 2,500 mm, which can be extended indefinitely using impact transfer and connection elements. Length is manufactured according to the order. 83 × 23 0120910 Easy Rider floor rail end stop For Easy Rider floor rail height mm Product code 17 23 0120922 0120917 Stainless steel/polymer version. Roller chassis – for Norm 5, 25, 20 and 12 shelving systems For upright depth Effective depth Product code mm 1 × 600 2 × 400 2 × 500 mm 638 852 1,052 0120932 0120952 0120962 Stainless steel version. To accommodate the respective shelves used, each with two ball-bearing-mounted brass rollers (Hupfer special rollers). Foot brake For assembly on the roller chassis. Horizontal cross brace for roller chassis Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 210 × 75 × 53 0120811 For shelf width Product code mm 600 0120943 700-1,500 0120942 Stainless steel version. To connect the roller chassis. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 35

1 ACCESSORIES 8 9 4 2 7 11 12 1 13 10 5 18 6 3 1 Cross brace, p. 36. 2 Bracing bar, p. 37. 3 Corner hooks, p. 37. 4 Shelf divider, p. 37. 5 Bottle shelf, p. 38. 6 Box storage shelf, p. 38. 7 Hanging rail support for hanging rail, p. 38. 8 Hanging rails, p. 38. 9 Sliding hook for hanging rail, p. 39. 10 Lateral push-through protection, p. 39. 11 Longitudinal push-through protection, p. 39. 12 Push-through protection, p. 39. 13 Shelf railing, shelf railing holder, p. 39, 40. 14 Ceiling and floor fixing attachment, p. 40. 15 Wall mount, p. 40. 16 Wall fixing, p. 40. 17 Weight distribution plate, p. 41. 18 Wire floor, p. 41. 19 Reinforced bar, p. 41. Wired shelf for GN containers, p. 38. Lockable secured shelving, p. 41. Website Further product details 14 15 16 19 17 Flexibility over optics Our accessories can be used flexibly for different shelving systems. Please note that the material and colour may not match the shelving system you have chosen. Cross brace Model Suitable for Product code Aluminium cross brace Stainless steel cross brace Stainless steel cross brace Norm 12, 20 Norm 5, 25 Norm 35 Stainless steel cross brace for back-to-back assembly Norm 5, 12, 20, 25 0203062 0103072 0126602 0103082 Adjustable to all shelf widths. For more information on the need for and use of a cross brace, see p. 12. One for all Our cross brace can be adjusted to all our shelf widths. 36 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

Bracing bar – alternative to the cross brace Model Order information: a. Ground clearance for first bracing bar b. Ground clearance for second bracing bar b a Suitable for Width mm Product code 1 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 900 1,000 1,300 Norm 20, 12 Material: Aluminium Norm 5, 25 Material: Stainless steel Norm 35 Material: Stainless steel 0217022 0217029 0217023 0217024 0217025 0217026 0217030 0217027 0217028 0117022 0117030 0117023 0117024 0117025 0117026 0117031 0117027 0117028 0114074 0114075 0114080 Right-angle extension is not possible with shelves with bracing bar. Corner hooks Model Shelf type Suitable for Product code For wired shelves Norm 5 For polymer louvred and solid shelves Norm 12 0103122 0603139 For Norm 20 solid and louvred shelves, and Norm 5 louvred shelves Norm 5, 20, 25 0203126 Double corner hook for right-angle attachment of a hanging rail to a louvred or solid shelf Norm 20 0211056 For further information on dimensions when using corner hooks, see p. 13. For right-angle assembly. Right-angle extension is not possible with Norm 35 shelving. Shelf dividers for solid shelves Model For shelf width For shelf depth Suitable for mm 600-1,000 600-1,000 1,200-1,500 1,200-1,500 700-1,300 700-1,300 mm 600 500 600 500 600 500 Norm 5, 20 Norm 25* Stainless steel version. * Not suitable for louvred and wired shelves. Dimensions W × D × H mm 558 × 100 × 210 458 × 100 × 210 558 × 100 × 219 458 × 100 × 219 558 × 100 × 210 458 × 100 × 210 Product code 7504220 7504221 7506197 7506198 7504220 7504221 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 37

1 Bottle shelf Model Suitable for Capacity for 0.75 and 1.0 l bottles (approx.) Dimensions Product code Units Units, stacked on 2 shelves Norm 5, 12, 20, 25 6 8 11 15 W × D mm 800 × 500 1,000 × 500 0104072 0104082 Silver-grey polymer-coated stainless steel version. Bay load 100 kg, right-angle extension not possible. Box storage shelf Model Suitable for Capacity Units Dimensions W × D mm Product code Norm 5, 12, 20, 25 3 beverage crates 1,000 × 500 0104052 Electro-polished, stainless steel version. Bay load 100 kg, right-angle extension not possible. Wired shelf for GN lid Model Suitable for Norm 5, 12, 20, 25 Electro-polished, stainless steel version. Capacity Units 1/2 GN lid 46 56 1/1 GN lid 23 28 1/3 GN lid 69 84 Dimensions W × D mm 1,000 × 600 1,200 × 600 Product code 0130492 0130432 Hanging rail support – to accommodate a hanging rail O n l y a t H u p f e r Model Material For For For For upright depth upright depth upright depth upright depth Norm 12, 20 Aluminium Norm 5 Stainless steel Norm 35 Stainless steel 300 mm 0221862 0123582 400 mm 0221872 0123592 500 mm 0221892 0123602 600 mm 0221902 0123612 For upright depth 510 mm For upright depth 610 mm 0126502 0126512 For holding the hanging rail, and for lateral securing of storage goods. Hanging rail Model Suitable for Material For shelf width Product code Norm 5, 12, 20, 35 Aluminium mm 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 0203162 0203232 0203172 0203182 0203192 0203202 0203242 0203212 0203222 Universal holder 45 × 10 mm, hooks on between two uprights, for holding hooks. 38 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

Sliding hook for hanging rail Model Suitable for Aluminium version. Continuous use in cold and deep-freeze rooms possible. Sliding onto a hanging rail for the storage of hanging food, for example Push-through protection – for front-side attachment Model 1 Product code 0306652 For upright depth Product code mm 400 500 600 0117401 0117402 0117403 Electro-polished, stainless steel version. Push-through protection – for attachment between two uprights on the side of a shelf Model Suitable for For shelf width Product code Norm 5.12, 20, 25 Electro-polished, stainless steel version. Push-through protection – for side attachment to the uprights Model Suitable for Norm 5, 25 Norm 12, 20 Electro-polished, stainless steel version. mm 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 0117411 0117418 0117412 0117413 0117414 0117415 0117419 0117416 0117417 For uprights H × D mm Product code 1,800 × 500 1,800 × 600 2,000 × 500 2,000 × 600 1,800 × 500 1,800 × 600 2,000 × 500 2,000 × 600 0130451 0130452 0130453 0130454 0204104 0204105 0204106 0204107 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 39

1 Shelf railing – for longitudinal securing of stored goods Model Suitable for O n l y a t H u p f e r For shelf width Product code Norm 5, 12, 20, 25 mm 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 1,500 Stainless steel version. Including polymer end caps. Right-angle extension not possible. Shelf railing holder Model Suitable for Norm 5,12, 20, 25 Stainless steel version. For use with shelf railing. Freely height-adjustable. Right-angle extension not possible. Ceiling and floor fixing attachment for uprights Model O n l y a t H u p f e r Suitable for 0115242 0115241 0115243 0115244 0115245 0115246 0115249 0115247 0115248 Product code 0115252 Product code Norm 5, 12, 20, 25 0103152 Stainless steel version. For additional securing of shelves. Fixing material not included. Wall mount for uprights Model Suitable for Material Norm 12, 20 Norm 5 Norm 35 All Norms Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel Attachment screw DIN 571 A2 Ø 5 × 40 mm Attachment screw DIN 571 Ø A2 5 × 50 mm Dimensions W × D × H mm 77 × 40 × 18 77 × 36 × 18 82 × 41 × 18 Product code 0116036 0116032 0116033 0116037 0116038 Stainless steel version. Attachment screws not included in wall mount. 300 mm m m 0 0 8 , 1 ! Principle: If the height of the shelf exceeds five times the depth of the shelf, then a tilt protection device must always be fitted to the wall. Source: Rules of the Employers’ Liability Insurance Association (BGN) 40 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

Wall fixing for uprights Model Suitable for Norm 5, 12, 20, 25 Dimensions W × D × H mm 85 × 68 × 58 All Norms Attachment screw DIN 571 A2 Ø 5 × 40 mm Attachment screw DIN 571 Ø A2 5 × 50 mm Stainless steel version. For uprights used against walls with coving. Attachment screws not included in wall fixing. 1 Product code 0116031 0116037 0116038 Weight distribution plate Model Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code All Norms 115 × 115 × 6 0203142 Aluminium version. O n l y a t H u p f e r Wire floor Model Material Aluminium Stainless steel Bay load with equal load distribution kg 200 200 160 160 200 200 Dimensions W × D × H mm 1,000 × 505 × 305 1,000 × 605 × 305 1,200 × 505 × 305 1,200 × 605 × 305 1,000 × 550 × 300 Product code 0203422 0203442 0203412 0203432 0114452 1,200 × 550 × 300 0114492 For self-assembly. Reinforced bar for shelves Model Suitable for For upright depth Product code Norm 5, 20, 25 Solid shelves mm 300 400 500 600 0102099 0102100 0102101 0102102 Stainless steel version. Offers increased surface stability of the shelves. Not possible with Norm 20 for shelf widths of 1,400 mm and 1,500 mm. Lockable secured shelving Model Suitable for Norm 5, 12, 20, 25 For shelves: 1,000 × 500 mm only Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 1,009 × 538 × 1,802 0219000 Aluminium version. Including 1,800 × 500 mm (H × D) uprights. For any Norm 5, 12, 20 or 25 1,000 × 500 mm (W × D) shelves only. Closed top. Perforated back and side panels for optimum air circulation. Hinged doors with Plexiglas filling and magnetic closure as well as eyelets for a padlock. Height-adjustable screw feet. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 41

1 MOBILE SHELVING Website Further product details Storage on wheels A fully-fledged mobile shelving unit. Delivery – storage – kitchen: non-stop – no rearranging or repacking of stored goods. A cleaning dream: Thorough cleaning is quite simple, even in the very back corners. Simply move the mobile shelves – it couldn’t be easier. SELF-ASSEMBLY TRANSPORT SHELVING UNIT – STAINLESS STEEL Transport shelving unit – self-assembly – height 900 mm Compactly packed This self-assembly transport shelving unit is securely delivered in compact packaging to save space. Model Model code For shelf size mm Pitch mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RTW/Z 10-5/900 RTW/Z 10-6/900 RTW/Z 12-5/900 RTW/Z 12-6/900 RTW/Z 13-5/900 RTW/Z 13-6/900 RTW/Z 14-5/900 RTW/Z 14-6/900 1,000 × 500 1,000 × 600 1,200 × 600 1,200 × 600 1,300 × 500 1,300 × 600 1,400 × 500 1,400 × 600 150 200 1,075 × 575 × 900 1,075 × 675 × 900 1,275 × 575 × 900 1,275 × 675 × 900 1,375 × 575 × 900 1,375 × 675 × 900 1,475 × 575 × 900 1,475 × 675 × 900 0121390 0121391 0121392 0121393 0121414 0121415 0121394 0121395 Stainless steel version. Without shelves. For shelves, see page 29. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Transport shelving unit – self-assembly – height 1,200 mm Model Model code For shelf size mm Pitch mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RTW/Z 10-5/1200 RTW/Z 10-6/1200 RTW/Z 12-5/1200 RTW/Z 12-6/1200 RTW/Z 13-5/1200 RTW/Z 13-6/1200 RTW/Z 14-5/1200 RTW/Z 14-6/1200 1,000 × 500 1,000 × 600 1,200 × 500 1,200 × 600 1,300 × 500 1,300 × 600 1,400 × 500 1,400 × 600 150 200 1,075 × 575 × 1,200 1,075 × 675 × 1,200 1,275 × 575 × 1,200 1,275 × 675 × 1,200 1,375 × 575 × 1,200 1,375 × 675 × 1,200 1,475 × 575 × 1,200 1,475 × 675 × 1,200 0121403 0121404 0121405 0121406 0121416 0121417 0121409 0121410 Stainless steel version. Without shelves. For shelves, see page 29. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Transport shelving unit – self-assembly – height 1,652 mm Model Model code For shelf size mm Pitch mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RTW/Z 10-5/1652 RTW/Z 10-6/1652 RTW/Z 12-5/1652 RTW/Z 12-6/1652 RTW/Z 13-5/1652 RTW/Z 13-6/1652 RTW/Z 14-5/1652 RTW/Z 14-6/1652 1,000 × 500 1,000 × 600 1,200 × 500 1,200 × 600 1,300 × 500 1,300 × 600 1,400 × 500 1,400 × 600 150 200 1,075 × 575 × 1,652 1,075 × 675 × 1,652 1,275 × 575 × 1,652 1,275 × 675 × 1,652 1,375 × 575 × 1,652 1,375 × 675 × 1,652 1,475 × 575 × 1,652 1,475 × 675 × 1,652 0123092 0123093 0123094 0123095 0121418 0121419 0123096 0123097 Stainless steel version. Without shelves. For shelves, see page 29. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. 42 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

FULLY WELDED TRANSPORT SHELVING UNIT – STAINLESS STEEL 1 Fully welded and heavy duty transport shelving unit versions. The all-rounder Goods delivery, storage, kitchen, cleaning: the all-rounder helps you in all areas. All-round protection Tough thanks to solid impact protection on all sides. Load carriers Extreme stability for loads up to 400 kg. For anyone carrying heavy loads. Body tension Fully welded bracing bars further increase stability in the housing. Robust wheels The wheels are fixed to bolt-on panels to give the chassis extra stability. Transport shelving unit – fully welded – heavy-duty design H e a v y d u t y Model Model code For shelf size mm Pitch mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RTW/S 10-5/1800 1,000 × 500 RTW/S 10-6/1800 1,000 × 600 RTW/S 12-5/1800 1,200 × 500 RTW/S 12-6/1800 1,200 × 600 190 400 1,065 × 563 × 1,800 1,065 × 663 × 1,800 1,265 × 563 × 1,800 1,265 × 663 × 1,800 0109642 0109702 0109672 0109732 Stainless steel version. Without shelves. For shelves, see page 29. Welded design. 4 swivel castors, 2 of which have total brakes, Ø 160 mm in corrosion-resistant housings. Transport shelving unit for system components – fully welded Model Model code Floor space Number of mm shelves Units Pitch mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RTW/ST 12-5/1800 1,150 × 500 4 400 200 1,275 × 625 × 1,800 0121625 Stainless steel version. Incl. 4 fully welded wired shelves 1,200 × 500 mm. For approx. 60-80 system upper and lower parts. 4 swivel castors, 2 of which have total brakes, Ø 125 mm, with pin fastening. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 43

1 SHELVES FOR TRANSPORT SHELVING UNITS Solid shelf for RTW/Z and RTW/S Model Width mm 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 For upright depth For upright depth 500 mm 0102672 0102742 0102772 0102812 600 mm 0102682 0102752 0102872 0102822 Stainless steel version. Only 1,000 mm and 1,200 mm shelves possible in RTW/S. Louvred shelf for RTW/Z and RTW/S Model Width mm 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 For upright depth For upright depth 500 mm 0101777 0101847 0101937 0101917 600 mm 0101787 0101857 0101947 0101927 Stainless steel version. Only 1,000 mm and 1,200 mm shelves possible for RTW/S. Wired shelf for RTW/Z and RTW/S Model Width mm 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,400 For upright depth For upright depth 500 mm 0101772 0101842 0101932 0101912 600 mm 0101782 0101852 0101942 0101922 Electro-polished, stainless steel version. Only 1,000 mm and 1,200 mm shelves possible for RTW/S. Wired shelf for Gastronorm lid for RTW/Z and RTW/S Model Width mm 1,000 1,200 1/1 GN lid Capacity 1/2 GN lid 1/3 GN lid For upright depth 600 mm 23 28 46 56 69 84 0130492 0130432 Electro-polished, stainless steel version. 44 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

1 MOBILE SHELVING UNIT – ALUMINIUM Cleaning made easy – thanks to the wheels, you can simply push the mobile shelving unit to the side. Transport shelving units are preferable for long distances. Mobile shelving unit, for self-assembly Model Model code Matching shelves Maximum RG-VRZ 10/5/1643 RG-VRZ 10/6/1643 RG-VRZ 12/5/1643 RG-VRZ 12/6/1643 RG-VRZ 13/5/1643 RG-VRZ 13/6/1643 RG-VRZ 15/5/1643 RG-VRZ 15/6/1643 W × D mm 1,000 × 500 1,000 × 600 1,200 × 500 1,200 × 600 1,300 × 500 1,300 × 600 1,500 × 500 1,500 × 600 load kg 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Dimensions W × D × H mm 1,035 × 539 × 1,643 1,035 × 639 × 1,643 1,235 × 539 × 1,643 1,235 × 639 × 1,643 1,335 × 539 × 1,643 1,335 × 639 × 1,643 1,535 × 539 × 1,643 1,535 × 639 × 1,643 Product code 0223015 0223017 0223016 0223018 0223061 0223062 0223027 0223026 Aluminium version. Collapsible. Can be moved for cleaning purposes. Without shelves. For shelves, see page 29. 4 polymer swivel castors Ø 125 mm, 2 of which have total brakes, in corrosion-resistant housings. Solid aluminium shelf – for self-assembly mobile shelving unit For upright depth For upright depth 600 mm 0202682 0202752 0202832 0202892 For upright depth 600 mm 0201782 0201852 0201932 0201992 For upright depth 600 mm 0602689 0602759 0602379 0602899 For upright depth 600 mm 0601789 0601859 0601379 0601999 Model Height mm 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,500 Aluminium version. 500 mm 0202672 0202742 0202802 0202882 Aluminium louvred shelf – for self-assembly mobile shelving unit Model Height mm 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,500 Aluminium version. For upright depth 500 mm 0201772 0201842 0201902 0201982 Solid polymer shelf – for self-assembly mobile shelving unit Model Height mm 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,500 For upright depth 500 mm 0602679 0602749 0602369 0602889 Version with polystyrene segments. Easy cleaning, suitable for washing device. Louvred polymer shelf – for self-assembly mobile shelving unit Model Height mm 1,000 1,200 1,300 1,500 For upright depth 500 mm 0601779 0601849 0601369 0601989 Version with polystyrene segments. Easy cleaning, suitable for washing device. 46 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

Bottle shelf – for self-assembly mobile shelving unit 1 Model Width mm Capacity for 0.75 and 1.0 l bottles (approx.) One shelf Unit Two shelves, stacked Unit 15 For upright depth mm Product code 500 0105082 1,000 8 Silver-grey polymer-coated stainless steel version. Right-angle extension not possible. 100 kg bay load with equal load distribution. Box storage shelf – for self-assembly mobile shelving unit Model Width mm 1,000 Electro-polished, stainless steel version. Capacity Units For upright depth Product code 3 beverage crates mm 500 0104052 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 47

1 WALL SHELVING Website Further product details Bay load Depth mm 300 400 Bay load with equal load distribution in kg/ per running metre 45 60 Adjustable rail for wall mounting – to hold brackets Model Shelf capacity 2 3 Stainless steel version, without fixing material. 3 bores. Pitch 75 mm. Bracket for adjustable rail – to hold Norm 5/20 shelves The perfect add-on – wall shelves are ideal for using every nook for storage. Choose between direct wall mounting or wall shelves with adjustable rail,which allows you to adjust the height of the shelves without the need for tools. Length mm 740 1,200 Dimensions W × D × H mm 60 × 25 × 740 60 × 25 × 1,200 Product code 0163432 0163433 Model For shelf depth Product code mm 300 400 0163461 0163462 Stainless steel version. Suitable Norm 5, 20 shelves from p. 29. 48 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

Bracket for adjustable rail – to hold storage shelves 1 Model For shelf depth Product code up to length 1,400 mm = 2 brackets from length 1,500 mm = 3 brackets Stainless steel version. Bracket for direct wall mounting – to hold storage shelves Model mm 300 400 0163434 0163435 Shelf depth mm 300 400 Product code 0163436 0163437 Stainless steel version. Fixing material not included. Storage shelf – for placement on brackets Model Width mm 600 800 1,000 1,200 Further widths on request. Stainless steel version. Rear side with 40 mm high upstand. 1,400 Für Tiefe 300 mm 0163422 0163423 0163424 0163425 0163426 Für Tiefe 400 mm 0163427 0163428 0163429 0163430 0163431 Bracket for adjustable rail – to hold pipe shelves Model Suitable for Shelf depth Direction Product code 4 pipe shelves 5 pipe shelves mm 300 300 300 400 400 400 Left Middle Right Left Middle Right 0163463 0163464 0163465 0163466 0163467 0163468 Stainless steel version. Pipe shelf – for placement on brackets Model Width mm For depth 300 mm All widths on request Stainless steel version. For depth 400 mm on request All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 49

GENERAL PURPOSE TROLLEYS 2 Stable: Continuous welded seams. Hygienic: Smooth and cavity-free raised edges. Quiet: Sound-insulated shelves. SW general purpose trolley – standard design Model Shelf dimensions mm SW 6×4/2 600 × 400 SW 8×5/2 800 × 500 SW 10×6/2 1,000 × 600 SW 6×4/3 600 × 400 SW 8×5/3 800 × 500 SW 10×6/3 1,000 × 600 Height of top shelf mm 800 850 850 800 850 850 SW 8×5/4 800 × 500 1,168 mm 538 591 591 252 278 278 278 Clearance Maximum Easy handling: Push bars integrated into the tubular frame. load kg 80 80 80 120 120 120 Dimensions W × D × H mm 695 × 495 × 900 895 × 595 × 950 1,095 × 695 × 950 695 × 495 × 900 895 × 595 × 950 1,095 × 695 × 950 Product code 0124002 0111932 0112052 0124012 0111962 0112082 150 895 × 595 × 1,265 0111992 SW 10×6/4 1,000 × 600 1,168 278 150 1,095 × 695 × 1,265 0112112 SW 8×5/5 800 × 500 1,480 278 150 895 × 595 × 1,575 011.2022 SW 10×6/5 1,000 × 600 1,480 278 150 1,095 × 695 × 1,575 0112142 Stainless steel version. Welded in, deep-drawn shelves with circumferential lip. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 54 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

HEAVY-DUTY GENERAL PURPOSE TROLLEY Maximum stability: Closed, all-round tubular frame. Additional reinforcement crossbars. Particularly stable castor attachment thanks to multiple mounting plate fixings. 2 SSW general purpose trolley – heavy-duty design H e a v y d u t y Model SSW 8×5/2 SSW 10×6/2 SSW 8×5/3 SSW 10×6/3 SSW 8×5/4 SSW 10×6/4 SSW 8×5/5 SSW 10×6/5 Shelf dimensions mm Height of top shelf mm Clearance Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 800 × 500 920 591 120 895 × 595 × 1,015 0112172 1,000 × 600 920 591 120 1,095 × 695 × 1,015 0112292 800 × 500 920 278 180 895 × 595 × 1,015 0112202 1,000 × 600 920 278 180 1,095 × 695 × 1,015 0112322 800 × 500 1,232 278 200 895 × 595 × 1,325 0112232 1,000 × 600 1,232 278 200 1,095 × 695 × 1,335 011.2352 800 × 500 1,545 278 200 895 × 595 × 1,640 0112262 1,000 × 600 1,545 278 200 1,095 × 695 × 1,640 0112382 Stainless steel version. Welded in, deep-drawn shelves with circumferential lip. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 55

ERGONOMIC GENERAL PURPOSE TROLLEY 2 Easy handling: raised push handle enables ergonomic horizontal and vertical access. Increased stability: upper shelf with reinforced bar, consisting of two fully welded longitudinal struts and one diagonal strut. SW general purpose trolley – ERGO E r g o n o m i c s Model Shelf dimensions mm Height of top shelf mm Clearance Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SW 8×5/2 ERGO SW 10×6/2 ERGO SW 8×5/3 ERGO SW 10×6/3 ERGO 800 × 500 850 591 120 1,035 × 595 × 1,270 0133703 1,000 × 600 850 591 100 1,235 × 695 × 1,270 0133723 800 × 500 850 278 140 1,035 × 595 × 1,270 0133713 1,000 × 600 850 278 140 1,235 × 695 × 1,270 0133733 Stainless steel version. Welded in, deep-drawn shelves with circumferential lip. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. HEAVY-DUTY ERGONOMIC GENERAL PURPOSE TROLLEY Easier to move: large cord corner guides. Ergonomic: horizontal and vertical access. Directionally stable manoeuvring: additional central fixed castor. High stability: all-round tubular frame, bolt-on panels with reinforce- ment crossbars and all shelves with reinforced bars and extremely robust wheels. SSW heavy-duty general purpose trolley – ERGO H e a v y d u t y E r g o n o m i c s Model Shelf dimensions mm Height of top shelf mm Clearance Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SSW 8×5/2 ERGO SSW 10×6/2 ERGO SSW 8×5/3 ERGO SSW 10×6/3 ERGO 800 × 500 920 510 120 895 × 595 × 1,250 0112222 1,000 × 600 920 510 120 1,095 × 695 × 1,240 0129730 800 × 500 920 237 180 895 × 595 × 1,250 0112252 1,000 × 600 920 237 180 1,095 × 695 × 1,240 0129731 Stainless steel version. Welded in, deep-drawn shelves with circumferential lip. 4 swivel castors, Ø 200 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which with total brakes and 1 with central fixed castor. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 56 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

SOLID BLACK GENERAL PURPOSE TROLLEY Special coating Insensitive, dirt-repellent coating based on vegetable raw materials. N E W 2 First-class design The transport trolley impresses with its refined, deep black look. Higher load capacity Special welding ensures extra-high load capacity. Extra solid Disk bumpers protect the general purpose trolley and your prem- ises from damage. Extra quiet Air-identic wheels enable optimal front-of-house use. Solid Black general purpose trolley Model Shelf dimensions mm Height of top shelf mm Clearance Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SW 8×5/3 Black 800 × 500 850 278 150 900 × 600 × 946 0112595 Stainless steel, matt black coated. Welded in, deep-drawn shelves with circumferential lip. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, air-identic, 2 of which have total brakes. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 57

ENCLOSED GENERAL PURPOSE TROLLEY 2 Behind closed doors Perfect for use in guest areas thanks to panels on all sides. Magnetic closure Doors remain securely closed even during transport. Extra quiet Thanks to air-identic and puncture-proof wheels. Enclosed general purpose trolley GSW Model Shelf dimensions mm Height of top shelf mm Clearance Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code GSW 8×5/2 800 × 500 855 591 GSW 10×6/2 1,000 × 600 855 591 80 80 900 × 600 × 950 0111934 1,100 × 700 × 950 0112054 GSW 8×5/3 800 × 500 855 278 120 900 × 600 × 950 0111964 GSW 10×6/3 1,000 × 600 855 278 120 1,100 × 700 × 950 0112084 Stainless steel version. General purpose trolley with stainless steel panels on three sides, two hinged doors including grip holes and magnetic closure. Welded in, deep-drawn shelves with circumferential lip. 4 swivel castors with air-identic and puncture-proof running surface for minimum noise when in motion, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 58 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

ACCESSORIES: GENERAL PURPOSE TROLLEY Reinforced bar Model VUZ SW 6×4 VUZ SW 8×5 VUZ SW 10×6 Suitable for SW model 6×4 SW model 8×5 SW model 10×6 Stainless steel version. Fully welded. Extra load: 20 kg. Three-sided gallery rail Model GA/3-s Ø8/599/330/50 for SW 6×4 GA/3-s Ø8/799/430/50 for SW and SSW 8×5 GA/3-s Ø8/999/530/50 for SW and SSW 10×6 Stainless steel version. Gallery height 50 mm. Four-sided gallery rail Model GA/4-s Ø8/599/399/50 for SW 6×4 GA/4-s Ø8/799/499/50 for SW and SSW 8×5 GA/4-s Ø8/999/599/50 for SW and SSW 10×6 Stainless steel version. Gallery height 50 mm. Hook-on container 2 Dimensions W × D × H mm 575 × 397 × 29 775 × 497 × 29 975 × 597 × 29 Dimensions W × D × H mm 599 × 330 × 50 799 × 430 × 50 999 × 530 × 50 Dimensions W × D × H mm 599 × 399 × 50 799 × 499 × 50 999 × 599 × 50 Product code 0114584 0114582 0114583 Product code 0114506 0114502 0114503 Product code 0114507 0114504 0114505 Model Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code ANH-BEH GN 420/200/250 SW for general purpose trolley 420 × 200 × 250 0116192 Stainless steel version. With clamp. Hook-on container GN 1/3-150 Model Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code ANH-BEH GN 1/3-150 SW for general purpose trolley 325 × 176 × 203 0116202 Stainless steel version. With clamp. Waste/laundry collector Model For general purpose trolley Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code MHR 120 350/283/736 SW 8 × 5 and 10 × 6 350 × 283 × 736 0114802 Stainless steel version. To hold 120 l waste bags. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 59

CLEARING TROLLEYS 2 Website Further product details Safe: high side panels protect glasses and crockery from falling out. Stable: Continuous welded seams. Hygienic: Smooth and cavity-free raised edges. Quiet: Sound-insulated shelves. Easy to manoeuvre: Push bars integrated into the tubular frame. Clearing trolleys Model Shelf dimensions mm Height of top shelf mm Clearance Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code ARW 10×6/2 1,000 × 600 850 591 80 1,095 × 695 × 1,031 0127762 ARW 10×6/3 1,000 × 600 850 278 120 1,095 × 695 × 1,028 0127772 Stainless steel version with welded, deep-drawn shelves with circumferential lip and 3-sided stainless steel apron, 100 mm high. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Clearing trolley – 2 shelves – high apron Model Shelf dimensions mm Height of top shelf mm Clearance Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code ARW 10×6/2 HS 1,000 × 600 700 372 120 1,095 × 695 × 1,012 0139292 Stainless steel version with 2 welded, deep-drawn shelves with circumferential lip and 3-sided stainless steel apron, 210 mm high. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Clearing trolley AMM – 3 shelves Model Shelf dimensions mm Height of top shelf mm Clearance Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code AMM 1205/695/1080 with 1,122 × 620 710 pull-out shelf 200 mm Top to middle shelf: 157 Middle to bottom shelf: 280 155 1,202 × 695 × 1,080 0163056 Stainless steel version with 3 shelves, 1 of which is removable (well for glasses, for example). 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 60 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

CLEARING TROLLEY Safe High side panels protect glasses and crockery from falling out. Optional hinged shelf Provides additional storage space. Whether short or tall At 710 mm, the low height of the top shelf is particu- larly child-friendly. 2 Increased stability Shelves with reinforced bars. Functional Pull-out drawer for crockery baskets with transport securing device. ACCESSORIES: CLEARING TROLLEY Hinged shelf for clearing trolley AMM – front-side Stainless steel version. Hook-on container GN 1/3-150 Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 625 × 320 × 40 0163255 Model Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code ANH-BEH GN 1/3-150 AMM for clearing trolley 325 × 195 × 212 0163195 Stainless steel version. With clamp. Hook-on container Model Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code ANH-BEH 420/200/250 AMM for clearing trolley 420 × 200 × 250 0163275 Stainless steel version. With clamp. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 61

SERVICE TROLLEY 22 Our all-rounder: Offers a compact all-purpose solution, especially for breakfast and dinner service, allowing for 500 × 500 mm crockery baskets, EN trays, GN containers and much more. Extra quiet Air-identic and puncture-proof wheels enable quiet use and make it easier to use on uneven surfaces. Optional: Frame top for service trolley, for tea packets or polymer containers for sugar, sweetener, milk, etc., for example. Optional: Clamp for tray transport cart – allows both trolleys to be pulled efficiently by one person. Service trolley 1 compartment 2 compartments 3 compartments Model Insertion dimensions mm Height of top shelf mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SVW 1 530 × 325, 530 × 370 990 100 488 × 655 × 1,111 0163509 SVW 2 530 × 500, 500 × 500 990 150 862 × 655 × 1,111 0163492 SVW 3 530 × 500, 530 × 370 990 200 1,265 × 655 × 1,111 0163438 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors with roller bearings, air-identic and puncture-proof, with pin fastening, Ø 125 mm, galvanised steel housing. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 6262 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

ACCESSORIES: SERVICE TROLLEY Frame top for service trolley 2 Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SVW 2, SVW 3 478 × 117 × 620 0163441 2 holding rails for polymer containers and tea display. Tow hook for service trolleys Model Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code ANH-BÜG 617/180/67 Tray transport carts 617 × 180 × 67 0163442 Stainless steel version. For attaching service trolleys to tray transport carts. Hook-on container Model Colour Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code AB 250/200/375 Grey 250 × 200 × 375 0163477 Polypropylene version with swing lid, stable and hygienic. Website Further product details All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 63

SPICE AND LADLE TROLLEYS 2 Website Further product details Easy handling: low empty weight and push bars integrated into the tubular frame. Easy to clean: chamfered and inwardly folded raised edges. Low noise: sound-absorbing lined shelves. Flexible: attach kitchen utensils anywhere. All-round protection: disk bumpers serve as collision protection. Spice and ladle trolleys Model Shelf dimensions mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code GLW 8×5 800 × 500 120 895 × 595 × 949 0114412 Stainless steel version. Shelves have openings for inserting 13 stirring implements (Ø 40 mm) and compartments for max. 10 spice jars (3 litres), 9 seasoning bottles and max. 2 buckets (10 litres). 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Model Capacity in litres Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 3-litre spice jar with lid 3 140 × 175 × 215 0114532 Spice jar with lid Polymer version, white, with lid. Bucket with lid and handle Model Capacity in litres Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 10-litre bucket with lid and handle 10 296 × 198 × 271 0114622 Polymer version, white. Ladle trolleys Model Shelf dimensions mm Perforated plate dimensions mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code LW 8×5 800 × 500 800 × 200 120 895 × 595 × 949 0115102 Stainless steel version. With 12 openings in each of the shelves that are fully welded in the upper part for insertion of stirring implements (Ø 40 mm), 2 fully welded bars for hanging ladles, meat forks, etc. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 6464 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

Website Further product details Cutlery and tray trolleys CUTLERY TRANSPORT SOLUTIONS Simple exchange Bring full trolleys to the kitchen, take reloaded trolleys back with you – thanks to the mobile design. 2 Model GN container capacity (included) Tray capacity (approx.) Shelf clear- Maximum ance mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BTW 4GN/ 50TA H:900 4 × 1/4-150 50 GN or EN 632 × 380 120 752 × 500 × 900 0163336 BTW 4GN/ 100TA H:1,300 4 × 1/4-150 100 GN or EN 632 × 380 120 752 × 499 × 1,292 0118622 BTW 5GN/100TA 5 × 1/4-150 H:1,300 100 GN 1/1 + 5 GN 1/4-150 794 × 380 120 914 × 499 × 1,290 0163446 BTW 8GN/200TA 8 × 1/4-150 H:1,300 200 GN or EN 670 × 593 200 790 × 713 × 1,292 0118632 Stainless steel version. GN container with movable sneeze guard for 100 pieces of cutlery per container. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-re- sistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Cutlery and tray trolley – incl. polymer top frame Model GN container capacity (included) Tray capacity (approx.) Shelf clear- ance mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BTW 4KGN/100TA 4 × 1/4-150 H:1,300 100 GN or EN 605 × 355 120 700 × 475 × 1,300 0116352 Stainless steel version. Polymer top frame for cutlery. GN container with movable sneeze guard for 100 pieces of cutlery per container. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 65 65

Tray dispenser with cutlery holder – open 2 Model GN container Tray column capacity (included) Tray capacity (approx.) Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code OTA-E BA-4GN 4 × 1/4-150 1 100 GN or EN 120 795 × 713 × 1,289 0118902 Stainless steel version. Open stainless steel guide basket with tension springs adjustable to serving height. GN container with movable sneeze guard for 100 pieces of cutlery per container. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Table top cutlery container Model GN container capacity (included) Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BA/4xGN 4 × 1/4-150 682 × 360 × 369 0118642 BA/8xGN 8 × 1/4-150 682 × 580 × 533 0118862 Stainless steel version. Removable GN container with movable sneeze guard for 100 pieces of cutlery per container. Cutlery soak sink – heated Model Power kW Electrical connection Thermostat setting °C Protec- tion class Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BTH 60-60 2.0 AC 220-230 V N Variable control PE 50/60 Hz from 20-70 IPX 4 120 805 × 765 × 730 0161750 Stainless steel version. Heated design to pre-soak pieces of cutlery, preferably for inserting under tabletops and conveyor systems, in combination with magnetic cutlery take-off solution. Heating: tubular heating element. Deep-drawn well 600 × 600 × 300 mm with 1” ball valve. Trivet 500 × 500 × 20 mm protects insert basket from direct contact with pan base. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 6666 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

ACCESSORIES: CUTLERY TRANSPORT SOLUTIONS Holder for napkin dispenser Model Holder 430/145/155 Holder 643/145/155 Holder 444/145/155 Suitable for BTW/4xGN BTW/8xGN OTA Stainless steel version. For side attachment. Gastro standard container for cutlery – with sneeze guard 2 Product code 0118932 0118942 0118952 Model BGN 1/4-150 HS Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 160 × 265 × 164 0116382 Stainless steel version. 1/4-150 GN container with movable sneeze guard for 100 pieces of cutlery per container. Napkin dispenser Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 105 × 311 × 132 0116690 Aluminium/polymer version. Fixing material not included. For approx. 275 25 × 30 mm napkins. Suitable for use on many of the Hupfer cutlery and tray trolleys as well as a stackable dispenser on a counter, when used in combination with an appropriate holder. Napkin dispenser – Incounter/add-on unit Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 120 × 300 × 148 8600010 Stainless steel version. To hold approx. 200 napkins with max. size 120 × 95 mm. Suitable for models BTW/4 × GN, BTW/8 × GN or OTA-E/BA-4 × GN when used in combination with holder for napkin dispenser. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 67

PLATE TRANSPORT TROLLEYS 2 2 Perfectly matched The low versions are perfectly matched to standard table heights and can be stowed under the table in no time at all. S p a c e s a v i n g Space saver The guiding principle here is a lot of dishes in a small space. Everything stays in place thanks to the additional wire basket dividers. Website Further product details Plate transport trolley – low version – can be loaded from one side only Model Shelf dimensions Lowest mm dispensing height mm TETW/n 1/26 875 × 255 248 Max. crockery capacity. 135 Ø 260 mm Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 995 × 485 × 770 0163479 TETW/n 1-6/26 875 × 518 248 270 Ø 260 mm 995 × 721 × 770 0163483 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Plate transport trolley – high version – can be loaded from one side only Model Shelf dimensions Lowest mm dispensing height mm Max. crockery capacity. Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code TETW/h 1/26 875 × 255 433 135 Ø 260 mm 995 × 485 × 955 0163480 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 68 68 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

Plate transport trolley – low version – can be loaded from two sides Model Shelf dimensions Lowest mm dispensing height TETW/n 2/26 875 × 255 mm 248 Max. crockery capacity. 270 Ø 260 mm Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 2 995 × 795 × 770 0163481 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Plate transport trolley – high version – can be loaded from two sides Model Shelf dimensions Lowest mm dispensing height TETW/h 2/26 875 × 255 mm 433 Max. crockery capacity. 270 Ø 260 mm Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 995 × 795 × 955 0163482 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. ACCESSORIES: PLATE TRANSPORT TROLLEYS Cutlery holder for plate transport trolley Model Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BEA TETW 935/310/303 All models 935 × 310 × 303 0163847 Stainless steel version. Holder for four cutlery containers GN ¼-150, for placing on a plate transport trolley. Thermoprotective cover for plate transport trolley Model SH 940/455/585 SH 940/735/585 Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code Plate transport trolleys 0163480, 0163479 940 × 455 × 585 0191246081 Plate transport trolleys 0163482, 0163481 940 × 735 × 585 0191223444 Polyethylene version. Wire basket divider for plate transport trolley Model Without fall- out protec- tion With fall-out protection With fall-out protection For use in plate transport trolleys TETW 26 × 252 × 578 0163485 Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code For use in plate transport trolleys TETW 205 × 276 × 578 0163486 For use in plate transport trolleys TETW-1/6-26 205 × 539 × 578 0163484 Electro-polished, stainless steel version. For side separation of plate stacks. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 69 69

2 S p a c e s a v i n g Gastronorm trolley with U-shaped rail Our option for extra safety: integrated tilt protection thanks to U-shaped rail. Gastronorm trolley with angle rail Our all-rounder: extra easy to operate. Gastronorm trolleys that can be pushed inside each other Our space-saving option for small rooms. Gastronorm trolley with tabletop Extra practical work surface on top. Gastronorm trolley that can be slid into refrigerators/ heated cupboards Parking perfection thanks to internal wheels. Gastronorm trolley with panels on all sides All-round protection with elegant design. Individual planning Our products can be individually adapted to your needs. Just get in touch. 71

GASTRONORM TROLLEY WITH U-SHAPED RAIL 2 Gastronorm trolley – U-shaped rails – lengthwise insertion Model Suitable for Number of runners Capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RWG 1/18 GN 75-L-U RWG 2/36 GN 75-L-U GN 1/1 0 3 5 325 GN 1/1 and their subdivisions GN 1/1 0 3 5 325 GN 1/1 and their subdivisions 18 18 × GN 1/1 90 454 × 619 × 1,662 0112775 2 × 18 36 × GN 1/1 180 813 × 619 × 1,662 0112575 Stainless steel version. Pitch: 75 mm. U-shaped rails according to DIN EN 18867-2 with tilt and push-through protection on both sides. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Gastronorm trolley – U-shaped rails – crosswise insertion Model Suitable for Number of runners Capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RWG 1/36 GN 75-B-U RWG 1/36 EN/GN 75-B-U GN 1/1 5 2 3 5 2 3 530 GN 1/1 and their subdivisions GN 1/1 530 EN 1/1 5 2 3 5 2 3 0 7 3 0 7 3 530 GN/EN 1/1 and their subdivisions 18 36 × GN 1/1 18 × GN 2/1 180 659 × 739 × 1,662 0112535 F o r G N & E N 18 36 × GN/EN 1/1 180 829 × 659 × 1,662 0118275 Stainless steel version. Pitch: 75 mm. U-shaped rails according to DIN EN 18867-2 with tilt and push-through protection on both sides. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 72 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

Gastronorm trolley – U-shaped rail – crosswise insertion – self-assembly Model Suitable for Number of runners Capacity Maximum load kg Compactly packed This self-assembly transport shelving unit is securely delivered in compact packaging to save space. Product code Dimensions W × D × H mm 2 RWG/Z 1/36 GN 75-B-U NB GN 1/1 5 2 3 5 2 3 530 GN 1/1 and their subdivisions 18 36 × GN 1/1 trays 200 739 × 659 × 1,659 0164294 Stainless steel version. For self-assembly. Collapsible. U-shaped rails according to DIN EN 18867-2 with tilt and push-through protection on both sides. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. GASTRONORM TROLLEY WITH ANGLE RAIL Gastronorm trolley – angle rail – lengthwise insertion Model Suitable for Number of runners Capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code GN 1/1 0 3 5 325 GN 1/1 and their subdivisions RWG 1/20 GN 75-L-L F o r b a k i n g t r a y s RWG 1/20 600/400 75-L-L 20 20 × GN 1/1 trays 100 454 × 619 × 1,818 0119002 20 20 baking trays 600 × 400 mm 100 691 × 528 × 1,818 0119022 Stainless steel version. Pitch: 75 mm. Angle rails according to DIN EN 18867-2 with push-through protection on both sides. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Gastronorm trolley – angle rail – crosswise insertion Model Suitable for Number of runners Capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RWG 1/40 GN 75-B-L GN 1/1 5 2 3 5 2 3 530 GN 1/1 and their subdivisions 20 40 × GN 1/1 or 20 × GN 2/1 200 659 × 739 × 1,818 0119012 Stainless steel version. Pitch: 75 mm. Angle rails according to DIN EN 18867-2 with push-through protection on both sides. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 73

GASTRONORM TROLLEYS THAT CAN BE PUSHED INSIDE EACH OTHER 2 Save space with the Gastronorm trolleys that fit inside one another The rule of thumb is 5 to 2: five empty gastronorm trolleys take up the same space as 2 full gastronorm trolleys. Gastronorm trolleys that can be pushed inside each other – U-rails Model Suitable for Number of runners Capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RWG/E 1/18 GN 75-L-U RWG/E 1/36 GN 75-B-U GN 1/1 0 3 5 325 GN 1/1 and their subdivisions GN 1/1 5 2 3 5 2 3 530 GN 1/1 and their subdivisions 18 18 18 × GN 1/1 Lengthwise insertion 36 × GN 1/1 or 18 × GN 2/1 Crosswise insertion 90 454 × 619 × 1,686 0163317 180 659 × 739 × 1,686 0112525 Stainless steel version. Pitch: 75 mm. U-shaped rails according to DIN EN 18867-2 with tilt and push-through protection on both sides. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 74 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

GASTRONORM TROLLEY WITH TABLETOP Gastronorm trolley with tabletop – U-shaped rails – lengthwise insertion 2 Model Suitable for Number of runners Capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RWG/AP 1/7 GN 75-L-U RWG/AP 2/14 GN 75-L-U GN 1/1 0 3 5 325 GN 1/1 and their subdivisions GN 1/1 0 3 5 325 GN 1/1 and their subdivisions 7 7 × GN 1/1 85 454 × 619 × 856 0112465 14 14 × GN 1/1 85 813 × 619 × 856 0112505 Stainless steel version. Pitch: 75 mm. U-shaped rails according to DIN EN 18867-2 with tilt and push-through protection on both sides. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Gastronorm trolley with tabletop – U-shaped rails – crosswise insertion Model Suitable for Number of runners Capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RWG/AP 1/14 GN 75-B-U GN 1/1 5 2 3 5 2 3 530 GN 1/1 and their subdivisions 7 14 × GN 1/1 or 7 × GN 2/1 85 659 × 739 × 856 0112445 Stainless steel version. Pitch: 75 mm. U-shaped rails according to DIN EN 18867-2 with tilt and push-through protection on both sides. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 75

GASTRONORM TROLLEY THAT CAN BE SLID INTO REFRIGERATORS/HEATED CUPBOARDS 2 Gastronorm trolleys for insertion into refrigerators/heated cupboards – U-shaped rails – crosswise insertion Model Suitable for Number of runners Capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RWG/S 1/36 GN 75-B-U GN 1/1 5 2 3 5 2 3 530 GN 1/1 and their subdivisions 18 36 × GN 1/1 or 18 × GN 2/1 180 589 × 669 × 1,630 0112555 Stainless steel version. Pitch: 75 mm. U-shaped rails according to DIN EN 18867-2 with tilt and push-through protection on both sides. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Gastronorm trolleys for insertion into refrigerators/heated cupboards – U-shaped rails – crosswise insertion Model Suitable for Number of runners Capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RWG/VT 1/36 GN 75-B-U GN 1/1 5 2 3 5 2 3 530 GN 1/1 and their subdivisions 18 36 × GN 1/1 or 18 × GN 2/1 180 659 × 739 × 1,665 0163351 Stainless steel version. Pitch: 75 mm. U-shaped rails according to DIN EN 18867-2 with tilt and push-through protection on both sides. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 76 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

ACCESSORIES: GASTRONORM TROLLEY Transport securing device for Gastronorm trolleys – swivelling for self-assembly 2 For 18 shelves For 20 shelves Product code 0113272 0113132 Thermoprotective cover for gastronorm trolleys Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SH 425/580/1500 for RWG model 1/18 and 1/20, GN lengthwise insertion 425 × 580 × 1,500 0123742 SH 630/690/1500 for RWG model 1/36 and 1/40, GN crosswise insertion 630 × 690 × 1,500 0123722 SH 610/775/1500 for RWG model 1/36, EN/GN crosswise insertion 610 × 775 × 1,500 0123732 Polyethylene version. With vision panel, zip fastener on the front. Thermoprotective cover for gastronorm trolleys Model SH – Thermo 630/690/1500 PE gr Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code For RWG model 1/36, GN crosswise insertion 630 × 690 × 1,500 0162651 Base plate for gastronorm trolley Model Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RWG-ELB 0112535 RWG-ELB 0118275 Model 0112535 671 × 586 × 30 0164350 Model 0118275 758 × 587 × 30 0164351 Stainless steel version. For retrofitting a gastronorm trolley for use in a Coolport® induction docking station. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 77

TAWALU – closed basic models with perspex door(s) 1 compartment 2 compartments 2 TAWALU – open basic models 1 compartment 2 compartments Versions TAWALU – open/closed For insertion and transport of trays holding dirty crockery. DIN EN 18867-2 push-through barrier on both sides. Sturdy tray racks made of 6 mm solid stainless steel, firmly connected to the tubular frame. Special-profile tubular frame with polymer connection elements. Effective impact protection due to 4 polymer swivelling disk bumpers. 4 swivel castors, 2 of which have total brakes, Ø 125 mm, in various versions. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Hygienic, sturdy anodised aluminium construction. Closed models Hinged doors with flat door handle that does not protrude beyond the impact protection on the trolley. Adjustable magnetic closure recessed into the profile frame so as not to get in t he way when loading trays. Website Further product details 79

EQUIPMENT LEVELS 2 Sizes Frame BASIC SMART BLACK INDIVIDUAL Standard sizes Standard & individual sizes Anodised aluminium Anodised aluminium Black anodised aluminium Anodised aluminium Basic finishes Smart finishes Individual finishes Galvanised steel housing with polymer wheel Polymer housing with polymer wheel Stainless steel housing with polymer wheel Galvanised steel housing with polymer wheel and air-identic tyres ü — — ü — — — — ü — Wheels (Ø 125 mm)* — — — ü — ü — — — — ü All models available in closed and open versions. *Other wheel versions available on request. BASIC – SIMPLE BUT EFFECTIVE optional optional ü optional optional optional optional Available in over 200 versions. Anodised aluminium frame. Rust-resistant wheels with bolt hole attachment, chrome-galvanised housing, polymer wheel and plain bearing. Available with Basic white or light grey finish. BASIC FINISHES WHITE LIGHT GREY 80

SMART – THE COMPLETE SOLUTION BLACK – DESIGN IN EVERY DETAIL 2 N E W In addition to the Basic model: Range of colours thanks to our new Smart finishes, which not only look good, but also have antibacterial properties. Puncture-proof and noise-insulated air-identic wheel for particularly quiet and comfortable transport. Same as the SMART design but with black components. SMART FINISHES U15230 LIGHT VANILLA U18003 CRYSTAL BLUE U19006 MINT A N T I - B A C T E R I A L P R O P E R T I E S U17005 CARMINE RED U18068 HEAVEN BLUE U19507 IRIS U16009 GOLDEN ORANGE U 15194 ZINC YELLOW U11077 CREAM WHITE U12168 CASHMERE U12257 GRAPHITE U12011 VULCANO R38000 NW CHESTNUT R20315 NW ARTISAN OAK R20128 RU SONOMA LIGHT OAK F79934 CR FERRO BLACK S60036 SX CLASSIC CONCRETE Finish application Open models: Side panels and middle panel. Closed models: Rear and side panels, middle panel, trolley top and floor. LIGHT Light and friendly. STRONG Modern, vibrant and eye-catching. ACHROMATIC Reserved and serious. WOOD Authentic, vibrant and natural. STONE Discreet and modern. 81

TAWALU: ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS TAWALU push handle 2 Product code — Aluminium version. Round tube with polymer end caps, fixed to the tubular frame. Not suitable for TAWALU with two compartments and doors. Gallery For TAWALU 1 compartment For TAWALU 2 compartments Product code — — Stainless steel version. With stainless steel trolley top for goods to be transported. Push-through protection, 1 compartment – for open TAWALU models Model Suitable for Product code DS TAWALU 1,435 DS TAWALU 1,635 TAWALU models 1,435 mm high TAWALU models 1,635 mm high Per compartment 0222908 0222909 Stainless steel version with wire from top to bottom for trolleys without rear panel. For 1 compartment in TAWALU. Basket – for open TAWALU models Model AKo TAWALU for TAWALU 2 × GN/EN 1/1 crosswise insertion for TAWALU 1 × GN 1/1 lengthwise insertion for TAWALU 1 × EN 1/1 lengthwise insertion for TAWALU Universal 1/1 crosswise insertion for TAWALU Universal 1/1 lengthwise insertion for TAWALU 2 × trapezoid Opening roof width Product code mm 540 335 380 470 355 485 0222560 0222566 0222567 0222563 0222565 0222564 Polymer-coated stainless steel version for tool-free attachment per compartment. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 83

TAWALU OPEN – 1 COMPARTMENT 2 Tray size Model Dimensions W × D × H mm min. recess width mm Pitch mm Tray capac- ity GN 1/1 0 3 5 325 EN 0 3 5 370 2 × universal 4 4 3 460 2 × GN 1/1 5 2 3 530 2 × EN 0 7 3 530 2 × trapezoid 0 5 3 480 TAWALU-1/ 6 GN TAWALU-1/7 GN TAWALU-1/9 GN TAWALU-1/11 GN TAWALU-1/15 GN TAWALU-1/7 GN TAWALU-1/9 GN TAWALU-1/10 GN TAWALU-1/13 GN TAWALU-1/18 GN TAWALU-1/6 EN TAWALU-1/7 EN TAWALU-1/9 EN TAWALU-1/11 EN TAWALU-1/15 EN TAWALU-1/7 EN TAWALU-1/9 EN TAWALU-1/10 EN TAWALU-1/13 EN TAWALU-1/18 EN TAWALU-1/12 UNI TAWALU-1/14 UNI TAWALU-1/18 UNI TAWALU-1/22 UNI TAWALU-1/30 UNI TAWALU-1/14 UNI TAWALU-1/18 UNI TAWALU-1/20 UNI TAWALU-1/26 UNI TAWALU-1/36 UNI TAWALU-1/12 GN TAWALU-1/14 GN TAWALU-1/18 GN TAWALU-1/22 GN TAWALU-1/30 GN TAWALU-1/14 GN TAWALU-1/18 GN TAWALU-1/20 GN TAWALU-1/26 GN TAWALU-1/36 GN TAWALU-1/12 EN TAWALU-1/14 EN TAWALU-1/18 EN TAWALU-1/22 EN TAWALU-1/30 EN TAWALU-1/14 EN TAWALU-1/18 EN TAWALU-1/20 EN TAWALU-1/26 EN TAWALU-1/36 EN TAWALU-1/12 DT TAWALU-1/14 DT TAWALU-1/18 DT TAWALU-1/22 DT TAWALU-1/30 DT TAWALU-1/14 DT TAWALU-1/18 DT TAWALU-1/20 DT TAWALU-1/26 DT TAWALU-1/36 DT 460 × 687 × 1,435 646 460 × 687 × 1,635 646 505 × 687 × 1,435 691 505 × 687 × 1,635 691 595 × 855 × 1,435 781 595 × 855 × 1,635 781 665 × 815 × 1,435 851 665 × 815 × 1,635 851 665 × 905 × 1,435 851 665 × 905 × 1,635 851 610 × 855 × 1,435 796 610 × 855 × 1,635 796 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 6 7 9 11 15 7 9 10 13 18 6 7 9 11 15 7 9 10 13 18 12 14 18 22 30 14 18 20 26 36 12 14 18 22 30 14 18 20 26 36 12 14 18 22 30 14 18 20 26 36 12 14 18 22 30 14 18 20 26 36 min./max. tray width mm 295/333 295/333 340/378 340/378 430/468 430/468 500/538 500/538 500/538 500/538 380/483 380/483 Product code 0222002-N 0222003-N 0222004-N 0222005-N 0222006-N 0222012-N 0222013-N 0222014-N 0222015-N 0222016-N 0222022-N 0222023-N 0222024-N 0222025-N 0222026-N 0222032-N 0222033-N 0222034-N 0222035-N 0222036-N 0222042-N 0222043-N 0222044-N 0222045-N 0222046-N 0222052-N 0222053-N 0222054-N 0222055-N 0222056-N 0222062-N 0222063-N 0222064-N 0222065-N 0222066-N 0222072-N 0222073-N 0222074-N 0222075-N 0222076-N 0222082-N 0222083-N 0222084-N 0222085-N 0222086-N 0222092-N 0222093-N 0222094-N 0222095-N 0222096-N 0222102-N 0222103-N 0222104-N 0222105-N 0222106-N 0222112-N 0222113-N 0222114-N 0222115-N 0222116-N 84 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

TAWALU OPEN – 2 COMPARTMENT Tray size Model Dimensions W × D × H mm min. recess width mm Pitch mm Tray capac- ity 2 × GN 1/1 0 3 5 325 2 × EN 0 3 5 370 2 × universal 0 6 4 344 TAWALU-2/12 GN TAWALU-2/14 GN TAWALU-2/18 GN TAWALU-2/22 GN TAWALU-2/30 GN TAWALU-2/14 GN TAWALU-2/18 GN TAWALU-2/20 GN TAWALU-2/26 GN TAWALU-2/36 GN TAWALU-2/12 EN TAWALU-2/14 EN TAWALU-2/18 EN TAWALU-2/22 EN TAWALU-2/30 EN TAWALU-2/14 EN TAWALU-2/18 EN TAWALU-2/20 EN TAWALU-2/26 EN TAWALU-2/36 EN TAWALU-2/12 UNI TAWALU-2/14 UNI TAWALU-2/18 UNI TAWALU-2/22 UNI TAWALU-2/30 UNI TAWALU-2/14 UNI TAWALU-2/18 UNI TAWALU-2/20 UNI TAWALU-2/26 UNI TAWALU-2/36 UNI 820 × 687 × 1,435 1,006 820 × 687 × 1,635 1,006 910 × 687 × 1,435 1,096 910 × 687 × 1,635 1,096 860 × 615 × 1,435 1,046 860 × 615 × 1,635 1,046 4 × GN 1/1 TAWALU-2/24 GN TAWALU-2/28 GN 1,230 × 815 × 1,435 1,416 530 5 2 3 TAWALU-2/36 GN TAWALU-2/28 GN TAWALU-2/36 GN 4 × EN TAWALU-2/24 EN 1,230 × 815 × 1,635 1,416 TAWALU-2/28 EN 1,230 × 905 × 1,435 1,416 530 0 7 3 TAWALU-2/36 EN TAWALU-2/28 EN TAWALU-2/36 EN 4 × trapezoid TAWALU-2/24 DT 1,230 × 905 × 1,635 1,416 TAWALU-2/28 DT 1,120 × 855 × 1,435 1,306 480 0 5 3 TAWALU-2/36 DT TAWALU-2/28 DT TAWALU-2/36 DT 1,120 × 855 × 1,635 1,306 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 175 150 175 150 125 175 150 175 150 125 175 150 6 7 9 11 15 7 9 10 13 18 6 7 9 11 15 7 9 10 13 18 12 14 18 22 30 14 18 20 26 36 12 14 18 14 18 12 14 18 14 18 12 14 18 14 18 min./max. tray width mm 295/333 295/333 340/378 340/378 315/353 315/353 500/538 500/538 500/538 500/538 380/483 380/483 Product code 2 0222152-N 0222153-N 0222154-N 0222155-N 0222156-N 0222162-N 0222163-N 0222164-N 0222165-N 0222166-N 0222172-N 0222173-N 0222174-N 0222175-N 0222176-N 0222182-N 0222183-N 0222184-N 0222185-N 0222186-N 0222192-N 0222193-N 0222194-N 0222195-N 0222196-N 0222202-N 0222203-N 0222204-N 0222205-N 0222206-N 0222212-N 0222213-N 0222214-N 0222222-N 0222223-N 0222272-N 0222273-N 0222274-N 0222282-N 0222283-N 0222232-N 0222233-N 0222234-N 0222242-N 0222243-N All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 85

TAWALU CLOSED WITH PERSPEX DOOR – 1 COMPARTMENT 2 Tray size Model Dimensions W × D × H mm min. recess width mm Pitch mm Tray capac- ity GN 1/1 0 3 5 325 EN 0 3 5 370 2 × universal 4 4 3 460 2 × GN 1/1 5 2 3 530 2 × EN 0 7 3 530 2 × trapezoid 0 5 3 480 TAWALU-1/ 6 GN TAWALU-1/7 GN TAWALU-1/9 GN TAWALU-1/11 GN TAWALU-1/15 GN TAWALU-1/7 GN TAWALU-1/9 GN TAWALU-1/10 GN TAWALU-1/13 GN TAWALU-1/18 GN TAWALU-1/6 EN TAWALU-1/7 EN TAWALU-1/9 EN TAWALU-1/11 EN TAWALU-1/15 EN TAWALU-1/7 EN TAWALU-1/9 EN TAWALU-1/10 EN TAWALU-1/13 EN TAWALU-1/18 EN TAWALU-1/12 UNI TAWALU-1/14 UNI TAWALU-1/18 UNI TAWALU-1/22 UNI TAWALU-1/30 UNI TAWALU-1/14 UNI TAWALU-1/18 UNI TAWALU-1/20 UNI TAWALU-1/26 UNI TAWALU-1/36 UNI TAWALU-1/12 GN TAWALU-1/14 GN TAWALU-1/18 GN TAWALU-1/22 GN TAWALU-1/30 GN TAWALU-1/14 GN TAWALU-1/18 GN TAWALU-1/20 GN TAWALU-1/26 GN TAWALU-1/36 GN TAWALU-1/12 EN TAWALU-1/14 EN TAWALU-1/18 EN TAWALU-1/22 EN TAWALU-1/30 EN TAWALU-1/14 EN TAWALU-1/18 EN TAWALU-1/20 EN TAWALU-1/26 EN TAWALU-1/36 EN TAWALU-1/12 DT TAWALU-1/14 DT TAWALU-1/18 DT TAWALU-1/22 DT TAWALU-1/30 DT TAWALU-1/14 DT TAWALU-1/18 DT TAWALU-1/20 DT TAWALU-1/26 DT TAWALU-1/36 DT 460 × 687 × 1,435 646 460 × 687 × 1,635 646 505 × 687 × 1,435 691 505 × 687 × 1,635 691 595 × 855 × 1,435 781 595 × 855 × 1,635 781 665 × 815 × 1,435 851 665 × 815 × 1,635 851 665 × 905 × 1,435 851 665 × 905 × 1,635 851 610 × 855 × 1,435 796 610 × 855 × 1,635 796 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 6 7 9 11 15 7 9 10 13 18 6 7 9 11 15 7 9 10 13 18 12 14 18 22 30 14 18 20 26 36 12 14 18 22 30 14 18 20 26 36 12 14 18 22 30 14 18 20 26 36 12 14 18 22 30 14 18 20 26 36 min./max. tray width mm 295/333 295/333 340/378 340/378 430/468 430/468 500/538 500/538 500/538 500/538 380/483 380/483 Product code 0222002-T 0222003-T 0222004-T 0222005-T 0222006-T 0222012-T 0222013-T 0222014-T 0222015-T 0222016-T 0222022-T 0222023-T 0222024-T 0222025-T 0222026-T 0222032-T 0222033-T 0222034-T 0222035-T 0222036-T 0222042-T 0222043-T 0222044-T 0222045-T 0222046-T 0222052-T 0222053-T 0222054-T 0222055-T 0222056-T 0222062-T 0222063-T 0222064-T 0222065-T 0222066-T 0222072-T 0222073-T 0222074-T 0222075-T 0222076-T 0222082-T 0222083-T 0222084-T 0222085-T 0222086-T 0222092-T 0222093-T 0222094-T 0222095-T 0222096-T 0222102-T 0222103-T 0222104-T 0222105-T 0222106-T 0222112-T 0222113-T 0222114-T 0222115-T 0222116-T The TAWALU-1/xx DT models for trapezoid trays are equipped with a second door instead of the rear panel! 86 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

TAWALU CLOSED WITH PERSPEX DOOR – 2 COMPARTMENT Tray size Model Dimensions W × D × H mm min. recess width mm Pitch mm Tray capac- ity 2 × GN 1/1 0 3 5 325 2 × EN 0 3 5 370 2 × universal 0 6 4 344 TAWALU-2/12 GN TAWALU-2/14 GN TAWALU-2/18 GN TAWALU-2/22 GN TAWALU-2/30 GN TAWALU-2/14 GN TAWALU-2/18 GN TAWALU-2/20 GN TAWALU-2/26 GN TAWALU-2/36 GN TAWALU-2/12 EN TAWALU-2/14 EN TAWALU-2/18 EN TAWALU-2/22 EN TAWALU-2/30 EN TAWALU-2/14 EN TAWALU-2/18 EN TAWALU-2/20 EN TAWALU-2/26 EN TAWALU-2/36 EN TAWALU-2/12 UNI TAWALU-2/14 UNI TAWALU-2/18 UNI TAWALU-2/22 UNI TAWALU-2/30 UNI TAWALU-2/14 UNI TAWALU-2/18 UNI TAWALU-2/20 UNI TAWALU-2/26 UNI TAWALU-2/36 UNI 820 × 687 × 1,435 1,006 820 × 687 × 1,635 1,006 910 × 687 × 1,435 1,096 910 × 687 × 1,635 1,096 860 × 615 × 1,435 1,046 860 × 615 × 1,635 1,046 4 × GN 1/1 TAWALU-2/24 GN TAWALU-2/28 GN 1,230 × 815 × 1,435 1,416 530 5 2 3 TAWALU-2/36 GN TAWALU-2/28 GN TAWALU-2/36 GN 1,230 × 815 × 1,635 1,416 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 100 75 175 150 125 175 150 12 14 18 22 30 14 18 20 26 36 12 14 18 22 30 14 18 20 26 36 12 14 18 22 30 14 18 20 26 36 24 28 36 28 36 min./max. tray width mm 295/333 295/333 340/378 340/378 315/353 315/353 500/538 500/538 Product code 2 0222152-T 0222153-T 0222154-T 0222155-T 0222156-T 0222162-T 0222163-T 0222164-T 0222165-T 0222166-T 0222172-T 0222173-T 0222174-T 0222175-T 0222176-T 0222182-T 0222183-T 0222184-T 0222185-T 0222186-T 0222192-T 0222193-T 0222194-T 0222195-T 0222196-T 0222202-T 0222203-T 0222204-T 0222205-T 0222206-T 0222212-T 0222213-T 0222214-T 0222222-T 0222223-T All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 87

STAINLESS STEEL TAWEDEL – TRAY CLEARING TROLLEY 2 TAWEDEL – Stainless steel tray clearing trolley – lengthwise insertion 1 compartment 2 compartments Model Tray size TAWEDEL 1/10 GN 125-L TAWEDEL 1/12 GN 100-L TAWEDEL 1/10 EN 125-L TAWEDEL 1/12 EN 100-L TAWEDEL 2/20 GN 125-L TAWEDEL 2/24 GN 100-L TAWEDEL 2/20 EN 125-L TAWEDEL 2/24 EN 100-L GN GN EN EN GN GN EN EN Effective dimensions mm 530 × 325 530 × 325 530 × 370 530 × 370 530 × 325 530 × 325 530 × 370 530 × 370 Tray capacity Pitch mm Dimensions W × D × H Product code mm 10 12 10 12 20 24 20 24 125 100 125 100 125 100 125 100 470 × 636 × 1,547 0138014 470 × 636 × 1,547 0138062 495 × 636 × 1,547 0138034 495 × 636 × 1,547 0138082 845 × 636 × 1,547 0138164 845 × 636 × 1,547 0138165 895 × 636 × 1,547 0138184 900 × 641 × 1,547 0138272 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. TAWEDEL – Stainless steel tray clearing trolley – crosswise insertion Model Tray size Effective dimensions mm Tray capacity Pitch mm Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 1 compartment 1 compartment TAWEDEL 1/20 B-EN 125 TAWEDEL 1/24 EN 100-B TAWEDEL 1/20 DT-125-B TAWEDEL 1/24 DT-100-B EN 530 × 370 20 125 845 × 675 × 1,547 0138094 EN 530 × 370 24 100 675 × 845 × 1,547 0138095 Trapezoid 480 × 350 20 125 605 × 845 × 1,547 0138114 Trapezoid 480 × 350 24 100 605 × 845 × 1,547 0138115 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 88 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ Website Further product details

TAWEDEL – ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS Stainless steel rear panel Model RV/TAWEDEL 1-GN-L RV/TAWEDEL 2-GN-L RV/TAWEDEL 1-DT-B RV/TAWEDEL 1-EN-B RV/TAWEDEL 1-EN-L RV/TAWEDEL 2-EN-L Stainless steel version. Bolted to the frame. Hardboard rear panel Suitable for Product code 2 TAWEDEL 0138014, 0138062 TAWEDEL 0138164, 0138165 TAWEDEL 0138114, 0138115 TAWEDEL 0138094, 0138095 TAWEDEL 0138034, 0138082 TAWEDEL 0138184, 0138272 0138372 0138373 0138371 0138370 0138368 0138369 Model RV/TAWEDEL 1-GN-L HDF RV/TAWEDEL 2-GN-L HDF RV/TAWEDEL 1-DT-B HDF RV/TAWEDEL 1-EN-L HDF RV/TAWEDEL 2-EN-L HDF RV/TAWEDEL 1-EN-B HDF Suitable for Product code TAWEDEL 0138014, 0138062 TAWEDEL 0138164, 0138165 TAWEDEL 0138114, 0138115 TAWEDEL 0138034, 0138082 TAWEDEL 0138184, 0138272 TAWEDEL 0138094, 0138095 0138378 0138379 0138377 0138374 0138375 0138376 Melamine-coated hardboard version. Special colours and finishes on request. Stainless steel side panelling Model Suitable for Product code SV/TAWEDEL TAWEDEL with lengthwise insertion SV/TAWEDEL TAWEDEL with crosswise insertion Stainless steel version. Panels on both sides. Bolted to the frame. 0138701 0138702 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 89

Hardboard side panel Model Suitable for Product code 2 SV/TAWEDEL For TAWEDEL with lengthwise insertion SV/TAWEDEL For TAWEDEL with crosswise insertion Melamine-coated hardboard version. Panels on both sides. Special colours and finishes on request. 0138714 0138715 Push handle Model SG/ TAWEDEL L SG/ TAWEDEL B Suitable for Product code TAWEDEL with lengthwise insertion TAWEDEL with crosswise insertion 0138704 0138705 Stainless steel version. Diameter of the bar: 20 mm. Bolted to the tubular frame. Trolley top Model WD/TAWEDEL 1 L-GN WD/TAWEDEL 2 L-GN WD/TAWEDEL 1 B-DT WD/TAWEDEL 1 L-EN WD/TAWEDEL 2 L-EN WD/TAWEDEL 1 B-EN Suitable for Product code TAWEDEL 0138014, 0138062 TAWEDEL 0138164, 0138165 TAWEDEL 0138114, 0138115 TAWEDEL 0138034, 0138082 TAWEDEL 0138184, 0138272 TAWEDEL 0138094, 0138095 0138710 0138711 0138709 0138706 0138707 0138708 Stainless steel version. Continuous gallery, height: 40 mm. 90 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer. com/en/

CONTAINER TRANSPORT SOLUTIONS Basket trolley – for dishwash baskets 2 Model Number of compartments Insertion dimensions Number of runners mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code KTW 1/10 50-50 1 500 × 500 to 515 × 515 10 120 638 × 630 × 1,752 0128892 High stainless steel version, with a usable height of 145 mm (clearance), for empty and loaded crockery baskets in sizes 500 × 500 mm to 515 × 515 mm. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Basket trolley with tabletop and gallery – for dishwash baskets Model Number of compartments Insertion dimensions Number of runners Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code KTW 1/5 50-50 KTW 2/10 50-50 1 2 mm 500 × 500 to 515 × 515 500 × 500 to 515 × 515 5 80 638 × 630 × 1,061 0128872 2 × 5 = 10 140 1,176 × 630 × 1,062 0128882 Low stainless steel version, with a usable height of 145 mm (clearance), for empty and loaded crockery baskets in sizes 500 × 500 mm to 515 × 515 mm. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Drip tray for basket trolley Model Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code KTW 1/5 50-50 Stainless steel version. For basket trolleys with baskets 500 × 500 mm 510 × 510 × 20 0128912 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ Website Further product details 91

Basket dolly for crockery baskets – without handle 2 2 Model Crockery baskets Platform dimensions Maximum mm mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code KR/oGr 50-50 500 × 500 to 520 × 520 525 × 525 80 529 × 529 × 190 0121593 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-protected housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Push handle Model Push handle for KR/oGr 50-50 Stainless steel version. Basket dolly for crockery baskets Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 610 × 310 × 885 0129163 Model Crockery baskets Platform dimensions Maximum mm mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code KR 50-50 500 × 500 516 × 518 80 708 × 580 × 1,021 0119332 KR 65-53 650 × 530 658 × 541 80 850 × 606 × 1,021 0112752 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-protected housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 92 92 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

PLATFORM TROLLEY Platform trolley – particularly stable – due to reinforcement crossbars 2 Model Platform dimensions mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code PW 8×5 800 × 500 120 895 × 595 × 1,012 0112602 PW 10×6 1,000 × 600 120 1,095 × 695 × 1,012 0112632 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-protected housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Reinforced bar for platform trolley Model Suitable for VUZ SW 8×5 VUZ SW 10×6 Stainless steel version. Fully welded. Extra load: 20 kg. PW model 8×5 PW model 10×6 975 × 597 × 29 Dimensions W × D × H mm 775 × 497 × 29 Product code 0114582 0114583 Platform trolley – particularly compact – due to small external dimensions Model Platform dimensions mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code PW 5.4×5.4 545 × 545 120 708 × 606 × 1,024 0112662 PW 8.2×5.4 820 × 545 120 983 × 605 × 1,020 0112692 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in corrosion-protected housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 93 93

Heavy-duty transport trolley H e a v y d u t y 2 Model Platform dimensions mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code TW/s 12 × 6 1,200 × 600 500 1,366 × 660 × 1,054 0162578 Stainless steel version. 2 swivel castors with total brakes and 2 fixed castors in corrosion-resistant housings, Ø 160 mm. Other wheel variants available. Front panel for heavy-duty platform trolleys Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code Heavy-duty platform trolley 0162578 551 × 526 × 21 0162588 Stainless steel version. With cut-outs at the side for hooking items on. Plate thickness: 1.0 mm. Heavy-duty platform trolley with plate H e a v y d u t y Model Platform dimensions mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code STWP 8.5×5 850 × 500 500 970 × 500 × 944 0114192 STWP 10×7 1,000 × 700 500 1,117 × 700 × 938 0114212 Stainless steel version. 2 swivel castors with total brakes and 2 fixed castors in corrosion-resistant housings, Ø 200 mm. Other wheel variants available. Website Further product details 94 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

Website Further product details Transport trolley for eutectic plates OTHER TRANSPORT SOLUTIONS 2 Model Insertion dimensions mm Number of Insertion Capacity Maximum runners type load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code KPTW 1/46 GN 60-B GN 530 × 325 46 Crosswise 46 × eutectic plates GN 1/1 200 745 × 665 × 1,660 0139282 KPTW 1/23 GN 60-L GN 530 × 325 23 Lengthwise 23 × eutectic plates GN 1/1 100 460 × 645 × 1,660 0162973 Stainless steel version. For storing and transporting eutectic plates GN 1/1. Product code 0129282: 2 fixed castors, 2 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, 2 of which have total brakes. Product code 0162973: 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, 2 of which have total brakes. Shelf pitch 60 mm. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Transport securing device for transport trolley for eutectic plates Model Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code TS KPTW 1/23+1/46 Models KPTW 1/46 and 1/23 1,345 × 120 × 51 0163637 For subsequent self-assembly. Pivoting. Pre-portioning EN trolley – crosswise insertion – 1 compartment Model Insertion dimensions Number of runners mm Capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code VTW 1/24 EN 115-B-U EN 530 × 370 12 24 EN trays or 24 EN insert baskets 220 659 × 819 × 1,652 0113065 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Shelf pitch 115 mm. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Base plate for pre-portioning trolley Model Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code VTW-ELB 0113065 Pre-portioning EN trolley 0113065 557 × 534 × 24 0164353 Stainless steel version. For retrofitting a pre-portioning EN trolley for use in a Coolport® induction docking station. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 95

Kitchen stool 2 Model Shelf dimensions mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code KH 45 F 450 × 450 120 450 × 450 × 500 0114932 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Round mobile container Model Capacity in litres Number of handles Chassis Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BHR 50L 50 BHR 50L SF 50 BHR 65L SF 65 2 2 3 Fixed 50 Ø 412 × 518 × 557 0124683 Separate 50 505 × 421 × 501 0124685 Separate 65 Ø 520 × 500 × 630 0124689 Stainless steel version. Round mobile container incl. lid. Product code 0124683 and 0124685: 4 swivel castors, Ø 75 mm, in corrosion-resistant hous- ings, polymer wheel with plain bearing. Product code 0124689: 4 swivel castors, Ø 50 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, with plain bearing. Potato and vegetable container Model Capacity KGWW 90L KGWW 160L Capacity: 90 l 2 × GN 1/1-200, perforated Capacity: 160 l 4 × GN 1/1-200, perforated Stainless steel version. With lever drain valve 2” sieve. Trivet for potato and vegetable container Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 807 × 610 × 605 0124262 810 × 615 × 580 0124272 Model Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code KGWW-SB Potato and vegetable container 733 × 543 × 25 0124263 Stainless steel version. For filtering dirt as perforated panel insert for potato and vegetable container. 96 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

Self-assembly defrosting trolley – height 1,650 mm Model Thawing pan dimensions W × D × H mm Pitch mm Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 2 RTW/Z 10-6/1650 AUF-TW 1,000 × 546 × 140 150 1,069 × 670 × 1,650 0121388 Stainless steel version. Including 4 thawing pans and 1 condensate pan. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, in stainless steel housings, 2 of which have total brakes. Hook-on container Model AB 50L AB 75L Capacity 50 L 75 L Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 450 × 545 0124162 520 × 535 0124172 Food-grade polymer version, sturdy and hygienic. Including 2 handles. Hook-on container lid Model Suitable for AB-DK 50L AB-DK 75L Hook-on container 50 l Hook-on container 75 l Food-grade polymer version. The clean and hygienic way to cover hook-on containers. Hook-on container chassis Model Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm 370 × 20 460 × 20 Dimensions W × D × H mm AB-FG 50L AB-FG 75L Hook-on container 0124162 (50 l) 554 × 481 × 287 Hook-on container 0124132 (75 l) 481 × 553 × 281 Stainless steel version. With hygienic polymer sealing caps. Adjustable support and fixing bar. Antistatic castors. Product code 0124202 0124212 Product code 0124232 0124132 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 97

Waste/laundry collector – 1 compartment – with foot pedal and lid 2 Model Holder frame dimensions in mm Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SWAF-1 350 × 250 × 30 350 × 496 × 913 0163920 Stainless steel version. With foot pedal, lid and rubber ring. 4 swivel castors, Ø 75 mm, 2 of which have total brakes, in corrosion-protected housings. Waste/laundry collector – 2 compartment – with foot pedal and lid Model Holder frame dimensions in mm Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SWAF-2 350 × 250 × 30 680 × 496 × 913 0163921 Stainless steel version. With foot pedal, lid and rubber rings. 4 swivel castors, Ø 75 mm, 2 of which have total brakes, in corrosion-protected housings. Waste/laundry collector – 3 compartment – with foot pedal and lid Model Holder frame dimensions in mm Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SWAF-3 350 × 250 × 30 1,010 × 496 × 913 0163922 Stainless steel version. With foot pedal, lid and rubber rings. 4 swivel castors, Ø 75 mm, 2 of which have total brakes, in corrosion-protected housings. 98 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

Castor set – polymer housing with polymer wheel (Initial ex works delivery of castor set instead of standard castor Ø 125 mm in galvanised steel housing) Wheel attachment Housing Castor bearing Tyres WHEEL VARIANTS 2 Diameter Ø mm Product code Pin Plate 1 set = 2 swivel castors with locks and 2 swivel castors Polymer, polymer wheel 1 set = 2 swivel castors with locks and 2 swivel castors Polymer, polymer wheel Suitable for washing devices. With thread guard. Ball bearing 85 Shore A 125 0127063 Ball bearing 85 Shore A 125 0127033 Castor set – stainless steel housing with polymer wheel (Initial ex works delivery of castor set instead of standard castor Ø 125 mm in galvanised steel housing) Wheel attachment Housing Castor bearing Tyres Diameter Ø mm Product code Pin Plate 1 set = 2 swivel castors with locks and 2 swivel castors Stainless steel, polymer wheel 1 set = 2 swivel castors with locks and 2 swivel castors Stainless steel, polymer wheel Suitable for washing devices. Ball bearing 55 Shore A 125 0163328 Ball bearing 55 Shore A 125 0163329 Castor set – galvanised steel housing with polymer wheel and air-identic and puncture-proof tyres (Initial ex works delivery of castor set instead of standard castor Ø 125 mm in galvanised steel housing) Wheel attachment Housing Castor bearing Tyres Diameter Ø mm Product code Pin Plate 1 set = 2 swivel castors with locks and 2 swivel castors Galvanised steel, Polymer wheel 1 set = 2 swivel castors with locks and 2 swivel castors Galvanised steel, Polymer wheel Ball bearing 82 Shore A 125 0127095 Ball bearing 82 Shore A 125 0127075 Air-identic and puncture-proof wheels. Polyurethane, foamed. This wheel type ensures minimum rolling noise and is particularly suitable for uneven travel paths. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 99

102

TRANSPORT SHELVING UNIT FOR EURO CONTAINERS More flexibility: mobility on robust wheels. Smart dimensions: also ideal for storing smaller quantities. All-round protection: disk bumpers serve as collision protection. Safe storage: with push-through protection and transport securing devices to separate between containers. 3 Transport shelving unit for Euro containers – without shelves At hand Sloped wired shelves facilitate access to the containers. Model Max. capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RTW/Z EB 5-6/1850 for 1-5 special wired shelves (max. 5 Euro containers) 80 670 × 570 × 1,851 0123103 RTW/Z EB 10-6/1850 for 1-5 special wired shelves (max. 10 Euro containers) 100 1,070 × 670 × 1,851 0123104 RTW/Z EB 14-6/1850 for 1-5 special wired shelves (max. 15 Euro containers) 200 1,470 × 670 × 1,851 0123102 Stainless steel version. Delivered partially assembled. Special wired shelves are available separately. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, 2 with locks. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Special wired shelf Model Suitable for Max. capacity Dimensions W × D Product code mm A-DR 1xEB 500/600 A-DR 2xEB 1,000/600 A-DR 3xEB 1,400/600 RTW/Z EB 5-6/1850 Per wired shelf: 1 Euro container 600 × 400 (max. 5 Euro containers) 500 × 570 0164171 RTW/Z EB 10-6/1850 Per wired shelf: 2 Euro containers 600 × 400 mm 1,000 × 570 0164172 RTW/Z EB 14-6/1850 Per wired shelf: 3 Euro containers 600 × 400 mm 1,400 × 570 0164173 Electro-polished stainless steel version. For inclined attachment in transport shelving units. 102 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

103

Transport shelving units for Euro containers – with solid shelves Model Max. capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RTW/Z EB 13-6/1650 For 12 Euro containers 600 × 400 mm 200 1,370 × 670 × 1,651 0123099 3 Stainless steel version. Delivered partially assembled. With 4 solid shelves. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, 2 with locks. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Transport shelving unit for Euro containers – with solid shelves – fully welded version Model Max. capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RTW/S EB 13-6/1650 For 12 Euro containers 600 × 400 mm 200 1,370 × 670 × 1,650 0123100 Stainless steel version. Welded design. With 4 solid shelves. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, 2 with locks. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 103

104

EURO CONTAINER PRODUCTION TROLLEY Space saver: ideal for tighter kitchens thanks to compact design. Quick to hand: with space for up to five Euro containers, ideal for picking smaller quantities. More flexibility: mobility on robust wheels. All-round protection: disk bumpers serve as collision protection. 3 Euro container production trolley Model Max. capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code PW EB 1/5 539/702/1530 for 5 Euro containers 600 × 400 × 300 mm 125 539 × 702 × 1,535 0163610 Stainless steel version. With 5 pairs of L-shape profile rails. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, 2 with locks. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 104 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

105

EURO CONTAINER PICKING TROLLEY Robustly built: ideal for transporting large quantities and heavy loads. Safe: continuous bars keep the goods securely together. All-round protection: thanks to solid, all-round corner bumpers. More flexibility: mobility on sturdy wheels. Euro container picking trolley 3 Model Max. capacity Base shelf mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RTW/S EB 82-63/1711 for 12 Euro containers 600 × 400 × 300 mm — 350 969 × 694 × 1,711 0163872 RTW/S EB 82-63/1711 ZB for 12 Euro containers 600 × 400 × 300 mm 820 × 630 350 969 × 694 × 1,711 0163798 Stainless steel version. 2 swivel castors with brakes and 2 fixed castors, 160 mm. Secured for transport Ergonomic gadget The containers can be secured for transport by means of two swivelling safety bars on the front. All picking trolleys can be upgraded to Movexx’s pulling aid T1.000, which has a motor to make pulling or pushing the trolley easy for everyone. The pulling aid can be purchased directly from Movexx. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 105

106

BASKET DOLLY FOR EURO CONTAINERS Practical: ideal for transporting empty or loaded containers. Spontaneous: ideal for mobile storage. More flexibility: mobility on robust wheels. Top handling: also available with push handle. 3 Basket dolly for Euro containers – without handle Model KR/oGr 60-40 EB Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 80 629 × 429 × 190 0164174 Stainless steel version. Without handle. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, 2 with locks. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Basket dolly for Euro containers Model Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code KR 60-40 EB 80 800 × 476 × 1,021 0164183 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, 2 with locks. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 106 Alle Angaben/Maße sind ca.-Angaben, technische Änderungen vorbehalten. · Stand: 01.09.2021 · Weitere Details, Modelle, Preise und Zubehör unter: www.hupfer.com All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

107

PLATFORM DISPENSER FOR EURO CONTAINERS All-rounder: transport, store and retrieve. Work ergonomically at a constant height. All-round protection thanks to solid impact protection on all sides. More flexibility: mobility on robust wheels. No tilting thanks to ball-bearing platform guide. Platform dispenser for Euro containers – open– reinforced design 3 Model Suitable for Platform Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BD/O EB 60-40 FM 1 stack of Euro containers 610 × 410 120 710 × 802 × 899 0163895 Reinforced, stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, 2 with locks. Platform dispenser for Euro containers – open Model Suitable for Platform Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BD/O EB 2/60-40 2 stack of Euro containers Horizontal arrangement: 820 × 610 240 758 × 1,023 × 982 0163524 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Along for the ride A transport trolley for moving containers that have already been emptied can be attached to the side attachment bracket. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 107

109

Basket dispensers For large quantities of crockery or pre-portioned food in baskets. P. 121 Dispenser for Porcelain norm For PN dishes and matching polymer covers. P. 126 Dispenser for polymer items For cloches, insulated items and polymer covers. P. 128 Thermal versions Unheated For dishes, trays and covers at room temperature. Statically heated For hot dishes for food serving and distribution. Fan-assisted heating Fast heating of dishes for hot distribution. Fan-assisted/100°C High heating capacity up to dish temperature of 100°C – for situations where the route to the guest is very long. Cooling slots For dishes that have been pre-cooled in the cold store for cold distribution. Fan-assisted cooling Active fan-assisted cooling for safely keeping temperature-sensitive food cold. 4 109

111

Plate dispenser – unheated Model Crockery Ø mm Number of dish stacks Max. capacity without lid Max. capacity with lid Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code TE 2/19-26 190-260 TE 2/18-33 180-330 2 2 144 166 crockery items crockery items 140 930 × 459 × 960 0162805 106 122 crockery items crockery items 140 1,050 × 529 × 960 0162806 Stainless steel version. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Lids not included! Matching lids can be found on page 113. Other wheel variants can be found on page 99. 4 Plate dispenser – statically heated Model Crockery Ø mm Number of dish stacks Max. capacity without lid Max. capacity with lid Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code TE/H 19-26 TE/H 18-33 190-260 180-330 TE/H 2/19-26 190-260 TE/H 2/18-33 180-330 1 1 2 2 72 83 crockery items crockery items 70 610 × 459 × 1,072 0162808 53 61 crockery items crockery items 70 710 × 529 × 1,072 0162809 144 166 crockery items crockery items 140 930 × 459 × 1,072 0162810 106 122 crockery items crockery items 140 1,051 × 529 × 1,072 0162811 Heating TE/H 19-26 TE/H 18-33 TE/H 2/19-26 TE/H 2/18-33 Heating Capacity Stainless steel tubular heating element Stainless steel tubular heating element Stainless steel tubular heating element Stainless steel tubular heating element kW 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.5 Electrical connection AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz Protection class Crockery temperature Temperature Thermostat setting IPX 5 IPX 5 IPX 5 IPX 5 max. 70°C max. 70°C max. 70°C max. 70°C control Variable control Variable control Variable control Variable control 30–115°C 30–115°C 30–115°C 30–115°C Stainless steel version. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Included in delivery: transparent lid(s), single-walled, high. Other lids can be found on page 113. Other wheel variants can be found on page 99. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 111

112

Plate dispenser – fan-assisted heating Model Crockery Ø mm Number of dish stacks Max. capacity without lid Max. capacity with lid Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code TE/UH 19-26 VS 190-260 TE/UH 2/19-26 VS 190-260 TE/UH 2/18-33 VS 180-330 1 2 2 72 83 crockery items crockery items 70 610 × 459 × 1,072 0162966 144 166 crockery items crockery items 140 930 × 459 × 1,072 0162967 106 122 crockery items crockery items 140 1,050 × 529 × 1,072 0163346 Heating Capacity Electrical connection Protection class Crockery temperature Temperature Thermostat setting 4 Heating TE/UH 19-26 VS Power module TE/UH 2/19-26 VS Power module TE/UH 2/18-33 VS Power module kW 0.9 1.5 1.5 AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz IPX 5 IPX 5 IPX 5 max. 80°C max. 80°C max. 80°C control Variable control Variable control Variable control 30–115°C 30–115°C 30–115°C Stainless steel version. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Included in delivery: transparent lid(s), single-walled, high. Other lids can be found on page 113. Other wheel variants can be found on page 99. The plate dispenser heated to 100°C via a fan-assisted heating system is particularly suitable for hot portioning on the meal make-up conveyor with subsequent hot transport (Cook & Serve). The right basic conditions such as food distribution temperature, heat insulation by means of cloches and insulation of the tray transport cart can ensure that the product’s core temperature does not fall below the critical limit of 65°C here. Plate dispenser – fan-assisted heating/100°C Model Crockery Ø mm Number of dish stacks Max. capacity without lid Max. capacity with lid Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code TE/UH 2/19-26 VC 190 – 260 2 130 138 crockery items crockery items 140 961 × 512 × 972 0161590 Heating Capacity Electrical connection Protection class Crockery temperature Thermostat Temperature control kW 2.0 AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz IPX 5 max. 100°C setting 30–130°C Variable control Heating TE/UH 2/19-26 VC Power module Stainless steel version. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Included in delivery: 2 transparent lids, single-walled, flat. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 112 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

113

Plate dispenser – cooling slots Model Crockery Ø mm Number of dish stacks Max. capacity without lid Max. capacity with lid Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code TE 2/19-26 K 190 – 260 2 144 166 crockery items crockery items 140 930 × 459 × 960 0162807 Stainless steel version. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Lids not included! Matching lids can be found on page 113. Other wheel variants can be found on page 99. 4 ACCESSORIES: PLATE DISPENSER Accessories Model Material Height mm Optics For model Product code Cover, flat Polymer 100 Semi- transparent Stacking compartments Ø 19-26 cm 0162200 Lid, high Polymer 200 Semi- transparent Stacking compartments Ø 19-26 cm Stacking compartments Ø 18-33 cm 0162201 0162202 Polycarbonate version, robust and shock-resistant. 3-point locking mechanism for release with little effort. Condensation drain for quick drying after cleaning, washing device safe, stackable. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 113

114

PLATFORM DISPENSER One for all: the stack for all dish shapes and sizes. 4 E x c l u s i v e l y a t H u p f e r Platform dispensers For larger quantities when distributing food. Platform dispenser with fan-assisted cooling This special device has fan-assisted cooling for cold portioning in communal catering and food distribution. With future-proof refrigerant R290. Universal crockery dispenser For use in recesses and during food distribution thanks to compact dimensions and attached push handles. Flexible crockery sizes Suitable for different crockery sizes thanks to individually adjustable guide bars. Website Further product details 114

115

PLATFORM DISPENSER Work ergonomically at a constant height. More flexibility: mobility on robust wheels. Maximum hygiene thanks to high-quality, rustproof stainless steel. No tilting thanks to ball-bearing platform guide. Helpful inspection openings in the base plate. Platform dispenser – unheated Model Suitable Max. for number of dish stacks 16 depending on crockery size Round crockery items Ø 140– 300 mm or rectangular crockery items with edge length 160–270 mm BD 60-60 Max. capacity without lid Max. capacity with lid Guide basket mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 4 306 372 600 × 600 200 902 × 760 × 900 0161780 Stainless steel version. Guide basket: Stainless steel platform. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery and the crockery size. Note: Lid not included in scope of delivery/price. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Platform dispenser – fan-assisted heating Model Suitable Max. for number of dish stacks Max. capacity without lid Max. capacity with lid Guide basket mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BD/UH 60-60 4S Round crockery items Ø 140– 300 mm or rectangular crockery items with edge length 160–270 mm 16 depending on crockery size 306 372 600 × 600 200 991 × 760 × 1,084 0162988 Heating Heating BD/UH 60-60 4S Power module Power kW 2.0 Electrical connection Protection Crockery temperature Temperature control Thermostat setting AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz class IPX 5 max. 80°C Variable control 30-115°C Stainless steel version. Guide basket: Stainless steel platform. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery and the crockery size. Included in delivery: 1 transparent polymer lid and 4 stainless steel guide bars. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Platform dispenser – with cooling slots Model Suitable for Max. num- ber of dish stacks Max. capacity without lid Max. capacity with lid Guide basket mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BD 60-60 K Round crockery items Ø 140– 300 mm or rectangular crockery items with edge length 160–270 mm 16 depending on crockery size 306 372 600 × 600 200 902 × 760 × 900 0161790 Stainless steel version. Guide basket: Stainless steel platform. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery and the crockery size. Note: Lid not included in scope of delivery/price. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 115

116

PLATFORM DISPENSER • UNIVERSAL CROCKERY DISPENSER Work ergonomically at a constant height. All-round protection thanks to solid impact protection on all sides. More flexibility: mobility on robust wheels. Maximum hygiene thanks to high-quality, rustproof stainless steel. No tilting thanks to ball-bearing platform guide. Helpful inspection openings in the base plate. Platform dispenser with fan-assisted cooling F u t u r e - p r o o f r e f r i g e r a n t 4 Model Crockery Ø mm Max. item capacity Guide basket mm Maxi- mum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BDC/UK 54-54 240-260 244 540 × 540 200 1,092 × 761 × 900 0161460 Cooling BDC/UK 54-54 Cooling Refrigeration capacity Capacity Electrical connection Protection Crockery temperature Refrigerant Fan-assisted cooling kW 0.4 kW 0.55 AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz class IPX 4 min. 5°C R290, CFC-free Stainless steel version. Guide basket: Stainless steel version. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Included in delivery: 1 stainless steel lid, flat, double-walled and insulated, with handle and 4 stainless steel guide bars. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Universal crockery dispenser – unheated Model Crockery Ø or Platform dimensions edge length in mm Max. capacity without lid Max. capacity with lid mm Maxi- mum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code UST 57-28 80-280 570 × 280 510 615 crockery items crockery items 100 750 × 510 × 900 0162991 Stainless steel version. Guide basket: Stainless steel grid, polymer-coated. For round and rectangular items with Ø or edge length 80-280 mm; also suitable for small items. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Included in delivery: 2 stainless steel guide bars. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Universal crockery dispenser – statically heated Model Crockery Ø or Platform dimensions edge length in mm Max. capacity without lid Max. capacity with lid mm Maxi- mum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code UST/H 57-28 80-280 570 × 280 510 615 crockery items crockery items 100 750 × 510 × 1,023 0162993 Heating Capacity Electrical connection Protection Crockery temperature Temperature Thermostat setting Heating UST/H 57-28 Stainless steel tubular heating element kW 1.0 AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz class IPX 5 max. 85°C control Variable control 30-115°C Stainless steel version. Guide basket: Stainless steel grid, polymer-coated. For round and rectangular items with Ø or edge length 80-280 mm; also suitable for small items. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Included in delivery: 1 transparent polycarbonate lid, 57-28, 2 stainless steel guide bars. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 116 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

117

Universal crockery dispenser – fan-assisted heating/100°C Model Crockery Ø or edge length Platform dimensions in mm mm Max. capacity without lid Max. capacity with lid Maxi- mum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code UST/UH 57-28 80-280 570 × 280 510 615 crockery items crockery items 100 750 × 510 × 1,020 0162994 Heating Heating Capacity Electrical connection kW 1.5 Crockery temperature Temperature control Thermostat setting 4 UST/UH 57-28 Power module AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz max. 100°C Variable control 30-115°C Stainless steel version. Guide basket: Stainless steel grid, polymer-coated. For round and rectangular items with Ø or edge length 80-280 mm; also suitable for small items. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Included in delivery: 1 transparent polycarbonate lid, 2 stainless steel guide bars. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Guide tube Holder for guide bars Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H Product code mm Stacking equipment BD, BDUH, UST, USTH, USTUH 20 × 825 0191124358 Suitable for Guide bars Product code UST and UST/H incounter universal dispenser 4 guide bars up to max. Ø 20 mm 0119462 For unused stainless steel guide bars – mounted on the front of an incounter universal dispenser. Two-piece holder made of polyethylene, consisting of upper and lower parts. Platform insert: cup dispenser Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code UST 57-28, UST/H 57-28, UST/UH 57-28 550 × 260 × 16 0162748 To optimise stacking of coffee and soup cups. Better sturdiness and stability when stacking due to the flat level as well as individual application options for the guide bars thanks to user-friendly hole guides. Easy attachment with the supplied fixing material. Lid Model Material Suitable for For platform dimensions mm Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code Lid Stainless steel Universal crockery dispenser 570 × 280 600 × 310 × 144 014122202 Cover, clear Polycarbonate Universal crockery dispenser 570 × 280 603 × 313 × 120 014122075 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 117

119

TRAY DISPENSER Work ergonomically at a constant height. All-round protection thanks to solid impact protection on all sides. More flexibility: mobility on robust wheels. Maximum hygiene thanks to high-quality, rustproof stainless steel. No tilting thanks to ball-bearing platform guide. Tray dispenser – 1 compartment – open N o w i n t e r - t h w i c h a n g e a b l e f o r m p l a t Model Suitable for Max. tray capacity per stack Guide basket mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 4 OTA 47-36 1 stack of universal trays 460 × 344 mm or trapezoidal trays 480 × 350 mm or 2 stacks of breakfast trays 325 × 212 mm OTA 53-37 1 stack of GN trays 530 × 325 mm or EN trays 530 × 370 mm or universal trays 460 × 344 mm or trapezoidal trays 480 × 350 mm or 2 stacks of breakfast trays 325 × 212 mm Approx. 120 490 × 380 120 800 × 515 × 900 0164626 Approx. 120 540 × 380 120 800 × 510 × 900 0164627 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Interchangeable platforms for tray dispenser – 1-compartment – open NEW Model OTA PF 47/36 OTA PF 53/37 OTA PF 50/50 Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 1 stack of universal trays 460 × 344 mm or trapezoidal trays 480 × 350 mm or 2 stacks of breakfast trays 325 × 212 mm 1 stack of GN trays 530 × 325 mm or EN trays 530 × 370 mm or universal trays 460 × 344 mm or trapezoidal trays 480 × 350 mm or 2 stacks of breakfast trays 325 × 212 mm 490 × 380 0164577 540 × 380 0164578 500 × 500 or 508 × 508 crockery baskets 523 × 523 0164579 Stainless steel version. For mounting on tray dispenser – 1-compartment – open. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 119 119

120

Tray dispenser – 2 compartment – open Model Suitable for Max. tray capacity per stack Guide basket Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 2 stacks of EN trays TA 2/53-37 530 × 370 mm or Approx. 240 760 × 539 240 963 × 685 × 909 GN trays 530 × 325 mm 0161770 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 4 Tray dispenser with adjustable platform Model Suitable for Max. tray capacity per stack Guide basket Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code OTA U-BW Various tray sizes Approx. 80-120 325-550 × 320-566 120 510 × 822 × 1,025 0161740 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Tray dispenser – open – with stacking device for Hupfer crockery return belts Model Suitable for Max. tray capacity per stack Guide basket Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code OTA 53-37 S Tray widths of 325-380 mm (adjustable) Approx. 100 540 × 315 120 515 × 803 × 900 0162777 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Tray dispenser – 1 compartment – closed Model Suitable for Max. tray capacity per stack Guide basket Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code TA/G 53-37 1 stacks of EN trays 530 × 370 mm or Approx. 120 540 × 380 120 513 × 820 × 900 GN trays 530 × 325 mm 0161760 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 120 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

121

BASKET DISPENSERS Real space-saving miracle workers: high-quality basket dispensers NEW Integrated crockery basket Closed basket dispensers with removable basket as guide basket. 4 Open basket dispenser Basket dispenser For stacking tasks at room temper- ature, e.g. within food preparation areas. For guest areas thanks to the closed construction. Basket dispenser with fan-assisted cooling This special device has fan-as- sisted cooling for cold portioning in communal catering and food distribution. Exclusively at Hupfer In addition to stacking equipment for 500 × 500 baskets, 650 × 530 baskets are also available for increased capacity. Website Further product details 121

122

OPEN AND STANDARD BASKET DISPENSERS Work ergonomically at a constant height. All-round protection thanks to solid impact protection on all sides. More flexibility: mobility on robust wheels. Maximum hygiene thanks to high-quality, rustproof stainless steel. No tilting thanks to ball-bearing platform guide. Basket dispenser – open – unheated N o w i n t e r - t h w i c h a n g e a b l e f o r m p l a t 4 Model Crockery baskets mm Maximum basket capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code OKO 50-50 500 × 500 or 508 × 508 6 × 115 mm high or 10 × 75 mm high 120 800 × 565 × 900 0164628 OKO 65-53 650 × 530 or 170 800 × 715 × 900 0162781 6 × 115 mm high 10 × 75 mm high NEW Stainless steel version. Guide basket: Stainless steel platform, upfold on all sides. For small and hard-to-stack items in baskets. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Interchangeable platform for basket dispenser – open – unheated Model OTA PF 47/36 OTA PF 53/37 OTA PF 50/50 1 stack of universal trays 460 × 344 mm or trapezoidal trays 480 × 350 mm or 2 stacks of breakfast trays 325 × 212 mm 1 stack of GN trays 530 × 325 mm or EN trays 530 × 370 mm or universal trays 460 × 344 mm or trapezoidal trays 480 × 350 mm or 2 stacks of breakfast trays 325 × 212 mm Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 490 × 380 0164577 540 × 380 0164578 500 × 500 or 508 × 508 crockery baskets 523 × 523 0164579 Stainless steel version. For mounting on basket dispenser – open – unheated. Basket dispenser – closed – unheated Model KO 50-50 Crockery baskets mm 500 × 500 or 508 × 508 KO 65-53 650 × 530 Maximum basket capacity Guide basket Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code Additional 6 × 115 mm or 9 × 75 mm high Additional 6 × 115 mm or 9 × 75 mm high 500 × 500 × 150 100 712 × 760 × 900 0161660 650 × 530 × 150 150 851 × 760 × 900 0161670 Stainless steel version. For small and hard-to-stack items in baskets. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Guide basket: Stainless steel, polymer-coated; the stacking platform (included in the price) is designed as a basket and can be included in the stacking capacity. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 122 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

123

Basket dispenser – fan-assisted heating Model Crockery baskets mm Number of dish stacks KO/UH 50-50 500 × 500 and 508 × 508 KO/UH 65-53 650 × 530 depending on crockery size depending on crockery size Maximum basket capacity Additional 6 × 115 mm Guide basket Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code or 500 × 500 × 150 150 850 × 761 × 1,078 9 × 75 mm high Additional 6 × 115 mm or 650 × 530 × 150 200 992 × 760 × 1,082 9 × 75 mm high 0161690 0161700 4 Heating KO/UH 50-50 KO/UH 65-53 Heating Capacity Electrical connection Protection class Power module Power module kW 2.0 2.0 AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz IPX 5 IPX 5 Crockery temperature max. 80°C max. 80°C Temperature control Variable control Variable control Thermostat setting 30-115°C 30-115°C Stainless steel version. Guide basket: Polymer-coated stainless steel. For crockery for soups and warm side dishes. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. The guide basket is designed as a basket and can be included in the stacking capacity. Included in delivery: 1 polymer lid, 1 basket as guide basket. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Basket dispenser – cooling slots Model Crockery bas- kets mm Maximum basket capacity Guide basket Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code KO 50-50 K 500 × 500 or 508 × 508 Additional 6 × 115 mm or 9 × 75 mm high 500 × 500 × 50 120 761 × 710 × 900 0161680 Stainless steel version. For crockery for cold meals. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corro- sion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Guide basket: Stainless steel, polymer-coated; the stacking platform (included in the price) is designed as a basket and can be included in the stacking capacity. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. ACCESSORIES: BASKET DISPENSERS R u s t p r o o f Coated crockery basket Model Mesh size mm Wire thickness mm Basket frame Basket base and Crockery basket//coat- ed 650/530/75 Crockery basket//coat- ed 650/530/115 25 × 43 25 × 43 5.0 5.0 walls 2.5 2.5 Dimensions W × D × H* mm 650 × 530 × 93 650 × 530 × 133 Product code 0117002 0117012 Grey, polymer-coated stainless steel version. Robust, fully welded construction. Washing device safe. Self-centring of baskets when stacking thanks to special corners, integrated into the basket frame. Coated crockery basket Model Mesh size mm Wire thickness mm Basket frame Basket base and Crockery basket//coat- ed 500/500/75 Crockery basket//coat- ed 500/500/115 25 × 45 25 × 45 5.0 5.0 walls 2.5 2.5 Dimensions W × D × H* mm 500 × 500 × 93 500 × 500 × 133 Product code 0116982 0116992 Grey, polymer-coated stainless steel version. Robust, fully welded construction. Washing device safe. Self-centring of baskets when stacking thanks to special corners, integrated into the basket frame. *incl. Stacking corner All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 123

124

Crockery basket Model Mesh size mm Wire thickness mm Basket frame Basket base and walls Dimensions W × D × H* mm Product code Crockery basket 650/530/75 27 × 27 Crockery basket 650/530/115 27 × 27 5.0 5.0 2.5 2.5 650 × 530 × 93 0113822 650 × 530 × 133 0113832 4 Stainless steel, electro-polished, looped version. Self-centring of baskets when stacking thanks to special corners, integrated into the basket frame. Crockery basket Model Mesh size mm Wire thickness mm Basket frame Basket base and walls Dimensions W × D × H* mm Product code Crockery basket 500/500/75 27 × 27 Crockery basket 500/500/115 27 × 27 5.0 5.0 2.5 2.5 500 × 500 × 93 0113812 500 × 500 × 133 0115332 Stainless steel, electro-polished, looped version. Self-centring of baskets when stacking thanks to special corners, integrated into the basket frame. Lid Similar to illustration Similar to illustration *incl. Stacking corner Model Material Colour For platform dimensions mm Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code AH PP 555/555/180/4 gr Polycarbonate Transparent AH PP 710/590/180/4 gr Polycarbonate Transparent For dispenser with baskets 500 × 500 mm For dispenser with baskets 650 × 530 mm 555 × 555 × 180 0119672 710 × 590 × 180 014041071 Coated crockery baskets Our coated stainless steel baskets with a high-quality, special polyamide soft coating ensure gentle handling and quiet transport of crockery. 124 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

125

BASKET DISPENSER WITH FAN-ASSISTED COOLING Work ergonomically at a constant height. All-round protection thanks to solid impact protection on all sides. Simply practical: just hang the lid on the hook. Cool: double-walled, insulated stainless steel lid with lip seal. Maximum hygiene thanks to high-quality, rustproof stainless steel. No tilting thanks to ball-bearing platform guide. Helpful inspection openings in the base plate. Platform dispenser with fan-assisted cooling Model Crockery baskets mm 500 × 500 or 508 × 508 650 × 530 BDC/UK 50-50 BDC/UK 65-53 Maximum basket capacity Additional 4 × 115 mm or 7 × 75 mm high Additional 4 × 115 mm or 7 × 75 mm high Cooling Cooling Refrigeration capacity Capacity kW Guide basket Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 4 500 × 500 × 150 100 1,092 × 761 × 900 0161450 650 × 530 × 150 150 1,212 × 761 × 900 0161451 Electrical connection Protection Crockery temperature Refrigerant BDC/UK 50-50 BDC/UK 65-53 Fan-assisted cooling Fan-assisted cooling kW 0.4 0.4 0.55 0.55 AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz class IPX 4 IPX 4 >=5°C >=5°C R290, CFC-free R290, CFC-free Stainless steel version. Guide basket: Polymer-coated stainless steel. With double-walled and insulated stainless steel lid. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. The guide basket is designed as a basket and can be included in the stacking capacity (guide basket included in delivery). Other wheel variants are available on page 99. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 125

127

PORCELAIN NORM STACKING EQUIPMENT Work ergonomically at a constant working height. All-round protection thanks to solid impact protection on all sides. More flexibility: mobility on robust wheels. Maximum hygiene thanks to high-quality, rustproof stainless steel. No tilting thanks to ball-bearing platform guide. Platform dispenser for porcelain norm crockery Model Suitable Max. number Max. capacity Platform Maximum for of dish stacks mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 4 BPN 4-P Porcelain norm crockery items 9 depending on crockery size 160 containers PN-1/1, 37 mm high or 340 plates PN-1/1, 22 mm high 470 × 340 160 710 × 530 × 900 0164088 Stainless steel version. Guide basket: HPL platform. Protective grid: polymer-coated stainless steel wire. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-re- sistant, 2 of which have total brakes. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery and the crockery size. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Stacking equipment for PN lids Model Suitable Max. number Max. capacity Platform Maximum for of dish stacks mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BPN 4-D Porcelain standard polymer lids 9 60 cloches depending on crockery size 1/2 EN 212 lids 1/1 PN 517 × 373 50 748 × 555 × 923 0164087-1 Stainless steel version. Guide basket: Stainless steel platform. Protective grid: polymer-coated stainless steel wire. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corro- sion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery and the crockery size. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Website Further product details All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 127

128

STACKING EQUIPMENT FOR POLYMER ITEMS Work ergonomically at a constant height. All-round protection thanks to solid impact protection on all sides. More flexibility: mobility on robust wheels. Maximum hygiene thanks to high-quality, rustproof stainless steel. No tilting thanks to ball-bearing platform guide. Inspection openings in the base plate. 4 Dispenser for polymer items – unheated Model Suitable Max. number for of dish stacks Max. capacity Guide basket Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BDK 57-57 Top and bottom parts of polymer insulation sets 9 depending on crockery size BDK 85-60 Polymer lids 12 depending on crockery size 306 570 × 570 80 761 × 851 × 909 0161810 406 850 × 600 90 760 × 1,171 × 909 0161820 Stainless steel version. Guide basket: Polymer-coated stainless steel basket. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery and the crockery size. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Dispenser for polymer items with cooling slots E x c l u s i v e l y a t H u p f e r Model Suitable Max. number for of dish stacks Max. capacity Guide basket Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BDK 57-57 K Top and bottom parts of polymer insulation sets 9 depending on crockery size 306 570 × 570 80 852 × 760 × 900 0162518 Stainless steel version. Guide basket: Polymer-coated stainless steel basket. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery and the crockery size. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 128 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

130

5 – MOBILE BAIN MARIE P. 131 P. 132 P. 133 5 Mobile bain marie with tubular heating element One, two, three or even four GN containers – in line with your require- ments. Mobile bain marie with foil heating Particularly energy-efficient and quick to use. Mobile bain marie with lateral mounted controls Ideal for use in mobile counters. P. 134 NEW P. 135 NEW P. 136 Mobile bain maries with Therma Dry heated well Extra economical thanks to infrared heating. Mobile bain marie with active cooling For providing non-pre-portioned cold food, portioning on the conveyor belt or self-service. Food serving trolley for cold food For everything that needs to stay cold: cold cuts, yoghurt, salads, etc. P. 137 P. 138 P. 139 GN container food serving trolley The solution for temperature-neutral or cold food in a cool environment. Pre-portioning EN Trolley Pre-portioned components flexibly at hand. 130 Accessories First-class accessories for your complete solution. Website Further product details

131

MOBILE BAIN MARIE WITH TUBULAR HEATING ELEMENT Hygienic: seamlessly fully welded bain-marie wells. Flexible: each bain-marie well can be heated individually to any temperature. Clean: the special shelf tilt ensures it can be emptied without leaving any residues. Robust: fully welded square tube set frame. All-round protection: disk bumpers serve as collision protection. Clear: thanks to embossed display of the maximum water level. Mobile bain maries – tubular heating elements – front-side operation Model Number of bain-marie wells Well size Max. container Maximum depth mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm D r y a n d w e t i n g * h e a t Product code 5 SPA EB-1 SPA EB-2 SPA EB-3 SPA EB-4 1 2 3 4 for GN 1/1-200 or smaller 200 55 677 × 604 × 900 0161470 for GN 1/1-200 or smaller 200 110 677 × 924 × 900 0164197 for GN 1/1-200 or smaller 200 165 677 × 1,274 × 900 0164198 for GN 1/1-200 or smaller 200 220 677 × 1,623 × 900 0164199 Heating SPA EB-1 SPA EB-2 SPA EB-3 SPA EB-4 Stainless steel tubular heating element Stainless steel tubular heating element Stainless steel tubular heating element Stainless steel tubular heating element kW 0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 Heating Capacity Electrical connection Protection class Temperature control Thermostat setting AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz IPX 5 Variable control AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz IPX 5 AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz IPX 5 AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz IPX 5 Variable control, separate for each well Variable control, separate for each well Variable control, separate for each well 30-95°C 30-95°C 30-95°C 30-95°C Stainless steel version. Fully welded, deep-drawn, individually heatable Therma Dry heated wells with large, cleaner-friendly radii and embossing for max. water level filling, to hold GN1/1 containers and their subdivisions. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. * Wet heating (recommended): The containers are filled with water up to the fill level mark. The hot steam keeps the food in the suspended GN containers warm for a long time and in an energy-efficient manner. Dry heating: The serving trolley can be heated without water. The heating element heats the air in the well, reliably keeping your food warm. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 131

132

E x c l u s i v e l y a t H u p f e r Robust: fully welded square tube set frame. All-round protection: disk bumpers serve as collision protection. Clear: thanks to embossed display of the maximum water level. MOBILE BAIN MARIE WITH FOIL HEATING Hygienic: seamlessly fully welded bain-marie wells. Flexible: each bain-marie well can be heated individually to any temperature. Clean: the special shelf tilt ensures it can be emptied without leaving any residues. Benefits of foil heating Ready for use in a short time: operating temperature can be reached within 30 min. 5 50% Energy savings of up to 50%*: the direct contact between the foil heating element and the GN well enables effective, fast heating. Comfort while working: particularly low waste heat allows for comfortable working temperatures. *Example of the EB-3 model. Mobile bain maries – foil heating – front-side operation Model Number of bain-marie wells Well size Max. container Maximum depth mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm i n g * h e a t W e t Product code SPA EB-2 FH SPA EB-3 FH 2 3 for GN 1/1-200 or smaller 200 110 677 × 924 × 900 0164205 for GN 1/1-200 or smaller 200 165 677 × 1,274 × 900 0164207 Heating SPA EB-2 FH SPA EB-3 FH Heating Capacity Electrical connection Foil heating element, device not suitable for dry heating Foil heating element, device not suitable for dry heating kW 1.4 2.1 AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz Protection class IPX 5 IPX 5 Temperature control Thermostat setting Variable control, separate for each well Variable control, separate for each well 30-95°C 30-95°C Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Fully welded, deep-drawn, individually heatable Therma Dry heated wells with large, cleaner-friendly radii and embossing for max. water level filling, to hold GN1/1 containers and their subdivisions. Note: Transport carts with foil heating are designed exclusively for heating up wells filled with water. Hupfer expressly excludes dry heating of the wells! Other wheel variants are available on page 99. * Wet heating: The containers are filled with water up to the fill level mark. The hot steam keeps the food in the suspended GN containers warm for a long time and in an energy-efficient manner. 132 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

133

MOBILE BAIN MARIE WITH LATERAL MOUNTED CONTROLS Sophisticated: Ideal for use in mobile counters. Hygienic: seamlessly fully welded bain-marie wells. Flexible: each bain-marie well can be heated individually to any temperature. Clean: the special shelf tilt ensures it can be emptied without leaving any residues. Robust: fully welded square tube set frame. All-round protection: disk bumpers serve as collision protection. Clear: thanks to embossed display of the maximum water level. Mobile bain marie – heated – with lateral mounted controls Model Number of bain-marie wells Well size Max. container Maximum depth mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm D r y a n d w e t i n g * h e a t Product code 5 SPA EB-2 LS SPA EB-3 LS 2 3 for GN 1/1-200 or smaller 200 110 886 × 677 × 900 0164206 for GN 1/1-200 or smaller 200 165 677 × 1,236 × 900 0164208 Heating SPA EB-2 LS SPA EB-3 LS Heating Capacity Electrical connection Stainless steel tubular heating element Stainless steel tubular heating element kW 1.4 2.1 AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz Protection class IPX 5 IPX 5 Temperature control Thermostat setting Variable control, separate for each well Variable control, separate for each well 30-95°C 30-95°C Stainless steel version. Fully welded, deep-drawn, individually heatable Therma Dry heated wells with large, cleaner-friendly radii and embossing for max. water level filling, to hold GN1/1 containers and their subdivisions. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. * Wet heating (recommended): The containers are filled with water up to the fill level mark. The hot steam keeps the food in the suspended GN containers warm for a long time and in an energy-efficient manner. Dry heating: The serving trolley can be heated without water. The heating element heats the air in the well, reliably keeping your food warm. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 133

134

E x c l u s i v e l y a t MOBILE BAIN MARIES WITH THERMA DRY HEATED WELL H u p f e r Mobile bain maries – with Therma Dry heated well NEW Model Number of bain-marie wells Well size Max. container Maximum depth mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SPA TD 3 mTR 3 GN 1/1 GN 1/2 200 190 1,311 × 695 × 1,417 0164495 Heating Capacity kW Electrical connection Protection class Temperature control 2 levels per well Preconfigured switching levels; Level 1 for GN container depths >100 mm (e.g. 150 or 200 mm) Level 2 for GN container depths <100 mm (e.g. 65 mm) Heating 5 SPA TD 3 mTR Infrared 1.02 AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz IPX 5 Stainless steel version. Seamlessly fully welded, individually heatable bain-marie wells with large, cleaner-friendly radii and removable loading flap, to hold GN1/1 containers and their subdivisions. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. THE BENEFITS ARE IN THE DETAILS 6 3 % e n e r g y s a v i n g Optimum food presentation Simply efficient Ideal handling • Constant temperature. • No preheating, thanks to infrared heating. • Ergonomic loading. • Two-step switch for temperature control. • Low wattage. • No steam hazard. • No overcooking from reheating. • 63% less energy consumption*. • Easy to clean. I n f r a r e d * In comparison to a bain marie with a 700 W heating element. 134 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

135

MOBILE BAIN MARIE WITH ACTIVE COOLING Suitable for future use: we use a confirmed future-proof refrigerant in accordance with the European F-Gas Regulation. Optimum settings: minimal ice or frost formation due to optimally adjusted cooling value. Hygienic: seamlessly fully welded bain-marie wells. Clean: the special shelf tilt ensures it can be emptied without leaving any residues. Robust: fully welded square tube set frame. All-round protection: disk bumpers serve as collision protection. Mobile bain marie – actively cooled NEW Model Number of bain-marie wells Well size Max. container Maximum depth mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm F u t u r e - p r o o f r e f r i g e r a n t Product code 5 SPA/K 2GN DW SPA/K 3GN DW 1 1 510 × 630 for 2 × GN 1/1-200 or smaller 510 × 955 for 3 × GN 1/1-200 or smaller 200 200 970 × 695 × 899 0129470-1 200 225 1,302 × 695 × 899 0129471-1 Cooling SPA/K 2GN DW SPA/K 3GN DW Refrigerant Temperature range Refrigeration system Refrigeration R290, CFC-free R290, CFC-free 6°C fixed Compressor cooling 6°C fixed Compressor cooling capacity kW 0.34 0.34 Capacity kW Electrical connection Protection class 0.365 0.365 AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz IPX 3 IPX 3 Stainless steel version. Large-volume, full-length wells, suitable for holding GN containers and their subdivisions, as well as for directly storing pack- aged products such as yoghurts or bottles. Cooling element positioned as a module underneath the well. Better hygiene provided by condensation-free usable space; high cooling performance by means of circumferential piping. CFC-free. The maximum cooling performance is applied automatically. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 135

136

FOOD SERVING TROLLEY FOR COLD FOOD Can be used anywhere: no power connection necessary. Optimum cold distribution: eutectic plates on top and in the middle panel. Low loss of cooling energy: optimal insulation on both housing and hinged doors. All-round protection: all-round bumper strip, effective even when the doors are open. Food serving trolley for cold food – lengthwise insertion – with 2 cabinet compartments Model Top plate cut-outs Number of cabinet com- partments Runners per Cut-out size Maximum cabinet for load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 5 KSPA 2/14 2 2 7 × GN 1/1-65 GN 1/1 180 992 × 690 × 915 0163251 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Included in delivery: 3 eutectic plates. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Food serving trolley for cold food – lengthwise insertion – with 3 cabinet compartments E x c l u s i v e l y a t H u p f e r Model Top plate cut-outs Number of cabinet com- partments Runners per Cut-out size Maximum cabinet for load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code KSPA 3/21 3 3 7 × GN 1/1-65 GN 1/1 175 691 × 1,382 × 915 0163252 Stainless steel version. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Included in delivery: 5 eutectic plates. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 136 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

137

GN CONTAINER FOOD SERVING TROLLEY Safe: push-through protection on both sides of the shelf rails. Everything within reach: additional GN containers can be hung on the top frame of the base frame. Hygienic: sturdy, high-quality stainless steel construction. Clean: easy cleaning of the open frame. All-round protection: disk bumpers serve as collision protection. GN container food serving trolley Model Runners Top frame/upper frame capacity Max. total capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SPA/O 3/24 A-3GN 3 × 8 GN 1/1- 65 lengthwise insertion 3 × GN 1/1-65/ 3 × GN 1/1-65/ 30 × GN 1/1-65 120 1,174 × 797 × 1,109 0112865 5 Stainless steel version. Mobile bain marie with three-part top frame to hold GN 1/1 containers and their subdivisions, for cold food. Pitch 75 mm. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. GN container food serving trolleys – top frame on left Model Runners Top frame/upper frame capacity Max. total capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SPA/O 3/24 AL-4GN 3 × 8 GN 1/1- 65 lengthwise insertion 4 × GN 1/1-65/ 3 × GN 1/1-65 31 × GN 1/1-65 120 1,165 × 829 × 1,388 0162644 Stainless steel version. Mobile bain marie with three-part and additional flush-left top frame to hold GN 1/1 containers and their subdivisions, for cold food. Pitch 75 mm. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. GN container food serving trolleys – top frame on right Model Runners Top frame/upper frame capacity Max. total capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SPA/O 3/24 AR-4GN 3 × 8 GN 1/1- 65 lengthwise insertion 4 × GN 1/1-65/ 3 × GN 1/1-65 31 × GN 1/1-65 120 1,165 × 827 × 1,388 0162645 Stainless steel version. Mobile bain marie with three-part and additional flush-right top frame to hold GN 1/1 containers and their subdivisions, for cold food. Pitch 75 mm. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 137

138

PRE-PORTIONING EN TROLLEY Dimensionally stable: high-quality, robust stainless steel frame. Clever: fully welded U-shaped rails provide tilt protection for trays or baskets. Safe: thanks to push-through protection on both sides at the shelf ends. All-round protection: solid impact protection on all sides. Pre-portioning EN trolley – crosswise insertion – 1 compartment Model Insertion dimensions mm Number of runners Capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm F o r c o l d c o m p o n e n t s Product code 5 VTW 1/24 EN 115-B-U EN 530 × 370 12 24 EN trays or 24 EN baskets 220 659 × 819 × 1,652 0113065 Stainless steel version. Shelf pitch 115 mm. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 138 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

139

ACCESSORIES: MOBILE BAIN MARIE Model Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code Hinged shelf on front side All mobile bain maries 614 × 250 × 30 0162264 Hinged shelf on long side All SPA 2-well models 650 × 250 × 30 0162261 Hinged shelf on long side All SPA 3-well models 999 × 250 × 30 0162262 5 Similar to illustration. Hinged shelf on long side All SPA 4-well models 1,350 × 250 × 30 0162263 Drain extension tube for mobile bain marie All mobile bain maries Length: 425 0162260 Eutectic plate GN 1/1 Food serving trolley for cold food 530 × 325 × 30 0163584 Gantry lamp modules with sneeze guard Gantry lamp modules with sneeze guard All SPA 2-well models 838 × 339 × 546 0172507006 All SPA 3-well models 1,138 × 343 × 546 0172507007 Low insertion basket Pre-portioning EN Trolley 530 × 325 × 70 High insertion basket Pre-portioning EN Trolley 530 × 370 × 108 0118612 7215010 Similar to illustration. Similar to illustration. Fold down tray slide All SPA 3-well models 1,168 × 313 × 122 0162899 Overshelf with sneeze guard All SPA 2-well models 780 × 444 × 380 0163013 Overshelf with sneeze guard All SPA 3-well models 1,135 × 444 × 380 0162901 Similar to illustration. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 139

142

FOOD TRANSPORT TROLLEYS Food transport trolley – statically heated Model Number of wells/ heated cupboards Capacity of wells/ heated cupboards Cupboard inte- rior dimensions W × D × H mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SPTW 2EBH 2WF SPTW 3EBH 3WF 2/2 12 × GN-65 530 × 325 120 922 × 700 × 979 0162943 3/3 18 × GN-65 530 × 325 140 1,317 × 700 × 979 0162946 6 Heating Heating Capacity kW 2.3 SPTW 2EBH 2WF Transport cart not suitable for dry Foil heating element heating! Foil heating element SPTW 3EBH 3WF Transport cart not suitable for dry 3.45 heating! Heating element for heated cup- boards Stainless steel tubular heating element Electrical connection Protection class Temperature control Thermostat setting AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz IPX 5 IPX 5 Variable control, separate for each well Variable control, separate for each well Variable control, separate for each heated cupboard 30-95°C 30-95°C 30-80°C Stainless steel version. 5 pairs of runners per heated cupboard, pitch 75 mm. Well holds max. 200 mm-deep GN containers. 2 swivel castors with total brakes and 2 fixed castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Energy efficient Very low waste heat due to good insulation and short well heat-up time thanks to foil heating. Slosh-proof An all-round raised edge prevents liquids from inadvertently running down the sides. Hygienic High-quality H2 design of heated cupboards and seamlessly fully welded wells. Thermally insulated The cabinet compartments can be indi- vidually heated or cooled with eutectic plates. Great insulation ensures the temperature is maintained. Quick cleaning All wells can be easily emptied at the same time via a floor drain. 142 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

143

FOOD TRANSPORT TROLLEY WITH SLIDING LID Food transport trolley – sliding lid Model Number of wells/ heated cupboards Capacity of wells/ heated cupboards Cupboard inte- rior dimensions W × D × H mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SPTW 2EBH 2WF SD SPTW 3EBH 3WF SD 2/2 12 × GN-65 530 × 325 140 1,000 × 795 × 1,062 0162945 3/3 18 × GN-65 530 × 325 200 1,393 × 795 × 1,062 0162948 6 Heating Heating Capacity SPTW 2EBH 2WF SD Transport cart not suitable for dry Foil heating element heating! Foil heating element SPTW 3EBH 3WF SD Transport cart not suitable for dry 3.45 heating! Stainless steel tubular heating element Heating element for heated cup- boards kW 2.3 Electrical connection Protection class Temperature control Thermostat setting AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz IPX 5 IPX 5 Variable control, separate for each well Variable control, separate for each well Variable control, separate for each heated cupboard 30-95°C 30-95°C 30-80°C Stainless steel version. 5 pairs of runners per heated cupboard, pitch 75 mm. Well holds max. 200 mm-deep GN containers. 2 swivel castors with total brakes and 2 fixed castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Along for the ride Thanks to the all-round gallery, other items, e.g. those in baskets, can also be transported at the same time. Hygienic High-quality H2 design of heated cupboards and seamlessly fully welded wells. Thermally insulated The cabinet compartments can be indi- vidually heated or cooled with eutectic plates. Great insulation ensures the temperature is maintained. Strong Both lid halves can be loaded with up to 40 kg when extended: Suitable for heavy GN containers. Energy efficient Very low waste heat due to good insulation and short well heat-up time thanks to foil heating. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 143

144

FOOD TRANSPORT TROLLEY WITH HINGED LID Food transport trolley – hinged lid Model Number of wells/ heated cupboards Capacity of wells/ heated cupboards Cupboard inte- rior dimensions W × D × H mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SPTW 2EBH 2WF KD SPTW 3EBH 3WF KD 2/2 12 × GN-65 327.5 × 560 × 438 140 945 × 729 × 1,043 0162944 3/3 18 × GN-65 327.5 × 560 × 438 140 1,315 × 729 × 1,043 0162947 6 Heating Heating Capacity kW 2.3 SPTW 2EBH 2WF SD Transport cart not suitable for dry Foil heating element heating! Foil heating element SPTW 3EBH 3WF SD Transport cart not suitable for dry 3.45 heating! Heating element for heated cup- boards Stainless steel tubular heating element Electrical connection Protection class Temperature control Thermostat setting AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz IPX 5 IPX 5 Variable control, separate for each well Variable control, separate for each well Variable control, separate for each heated cupboard 30-95°C 30-95°C 30-80°C Stainless steel version. 5 pairs of runners per heated cupboard, pitch 75 mm. Well holds max. 200 mm-deep GN containers. 2 swivel castors with total brakes and 2 fixed castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. A sense of order If the large lid is folded down completely, the GN lids that are not required can simply be inserted into it. Storage space The small lid, with removable drip tray, can be folded down completely if required or simply snapped into place to serve as a storage surface for items such as ladles. Energy efficient Very low heat emissions due to good insulation and short well heat-up time thanks to foil heating. Hygienic High-quality H2 design of heated cupboards and seamlessly fully welded wells. Thermally insulated The cabinet compartments can be individually heated or cooled with eutectic plates. Great insulation ensures the temperature is maintained. 144 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

145

FOOD TRANSPORT TROLLEY WITH PLATE DISPENSER AND HINGED LID Food transport trolley – plate dispenser and hinged lid Model Ø of plate dispenser Number of wells/ heated Capacity of wells/ heated cup- mm cupboards boards Cupboard inte- rior dimensions W × D × H mm Maxi- mum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SPTW 2EBH 2WF TEHCO 190 – 260 (Capacity for 60-70 plates) 2/2 10 × GN-65 330 × 540 × 370 178 1,324 × 673 × 1,118 0162754 Heating Heating Capacity SPTW 2EBH 2WF TEHCO Foil heating element Transport cart not suitable for dry heating! kW 2.8 Electrical connection AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz Protection Temperature control Thermostat setting class IPX 4 Variable control, separate for each well Variable control, separate for each heated cupboard 30-95°C 30-80°C 6 Heating element for heated cup- boards Plate dispenser heating element Stainless steel tubular heating element Stainless steel tubular heating element Variable control 30-80°C Stainless steel version. 4 pairs of runners per heated cupboard, pitch 75 mm. Well holds max. 200 mm-deep GN containers. Without sneeze guard, 1 compartment, unheated. 4 swivel castors, Ø 160 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, 2 with total brakes and 1 central fixed castor. Included in delivery: 1 transparent lid 19-26, single-walled, high, 1 stainless steel hinged lid divided 1/3 to 2/3. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. All-in-one Thanks to additionally installed plate dispensers, the required crockery is also available. Well thought-out The integrated GN container serves as a practical ladle shelf and the neutral compartment also provides additional storage space for temperature-neutral food. Thermally insulated The cabinet compartments can be indi- vidually heated or cooled with eutectic plates. Great insulation ensures the temperature is maintained. Hinged lids The small lid can optionally be fixed as a useful storage surface. The rear lid can be folded down completely to serve as a shelf for the GN lids. Energy efficient Very low heat emissions due to good insulation and short well heat-up time thanks to foil heating. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 145

146

ACCESSORIES: FOOD TRANSPORT TROLLEYS Model Suitable for Hinged shelf on front side Hinged shelf on front side Hinged shelf, long side, 2 wells Similar to illustration. Hinged shelf, long side, 3 wells SPTW statically heated 0162943, 0162946 SPTW with hinged lid 0162944, 0162947 SPTW statically heated 0162943 SPTW statically heated 0162946 Dimensions W × D × H mm 641 × 250 × 30 580 × 250 × 30 650 × 250 × 30 999 × 250 × 30 Product code 0163038 0163037 0162261 0162262 Sneeze guard, retractable SPTW with plate dispenser 0162754 763 × 35 × 420 0162629 6 Overshelf with sneeze guard, 2 wells SPTW statically heated 0162943 780 × 444 × 380 0163013 Similar to illustration. Overshelf with sneeze guard, 3 wells SPTW statically heated 0162946 1,135 × 444 × 380 0162901 Gantry lamp modules with sneeze guard, 2 wells SPTW statically heated, with hinged lid, with plate dispenser 0162943, 0162944, 0162754, 0162945 838 × 339 × 546 0172507006 Similar to illustration. Gantry lamp modules with sneeze guard, 3 wells SPTW statically heated, with hinged lid, with sliding lid 0162946, 0162947, 0162948 1,180 × 343 × 546 0172507007 Eutectic plate GN 1/1 All SPTW models 530 × 325 × 30 0163584 Tray slide, 2 wells SPTW statically heated, with sliding lid, with plate dispenser 0162943, 0162945, 0162754 816 × 313 × 122 0172507001 Similar to illustration. Tray slide, 3 wells for 0162946, 0162948 1,211 × 313 × 122 0172507003 146 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

148

7 – ISOBOX® FOOD TRANSPORT TROLLEY 7 The food transport trolley adapted for your requirements ISOBOX® Mobil Flex Maximum flexibility: without effort – without tools. Just a flick of the wrist and the compartment that keeps food warm becomes one that keeps it cold – or vice versa. Ideal for off-premises transport, catering and long transport distances between kitchen and serving station. i n g , i n g o r u n i t h h e a t W i c o o l n e u t r a l t Optional: Heating plate on the top for direct food service. P. 149 ISOBOX® Mobil Basic Maximum reliability: outstanding insulating properties to keep your food hot, cold or neutral even without active technology. The entry-level model for transporting cold or hot food with a short time spent in the trolley. P. 154 Website Further product details 148

149

Website Further product details ISOBOX® MOBIL FLEX Special insulation Great insulation ensures the temperature is maintained: low temperature loss and minimal influence on neighbouring compartments. Lockable doors 270° pivoting doors are securely held open by a magnet. All-round protection Solid corner bumpers provide sufficient protec- tion for the ISOBOX® and walls. Optional: HGV transport securing device, eutectic plates. Heating, cooling or neutral units In the Flex version, the modules can be exchanged without the need for tools, making it possible to react spontaneously to changing requirements or a defective module. 230V power One socket is sufficient for the ISOBOX® to reliably maintain the selected temperature in stationary operation. Ergonomic Integrated push handles offer optimal ergonomic features and ideal handling. 7 Hygienic Easy to clean, stainless steel beaded walls. Max. 95°C. Up to an ambient temperature of max. 25°C or 32°C. Heating unit: Cooling unit: Your ISOBOX® in your favourite design Design the transport trolley according to your taste or needs, e.g. “traffic red” for trolleys with hot food and “sky blue” for cold food transport. U15230 LIGHT VANILLA U18003 CRYSTAL BLUE U19006 MINT U17005 CARMINE RED U18068 HEAVEN BLUE U19507 IRIS U16009 GOLDEN ORANGE U 15194 ZINC YELLOW U11077 CREAM WHITE U12168 CASHMERE U12257 GRAPHITE U12011 VULCANO R38000 NW CHESTNUT R20315 NW ARTISAN OAK R20128 RU SONOMA LIGHT OAK F79934 CR FERRO BLACK S60036 SX CLASSIC CONCRETE A N T I B A C T E R I A L P R O P E R T I E S LIGHT Light and friendly. STRONG Modern, vibrant and eye-catching. ACHROMATIC Reserved and serious. WOOD Authentic, vibrant and natural. STONE Discreet and modern. 149 149 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

150

ISOBOX® Mobil Flex – 1-compartment – low version Model ISOBOX® Mobil Flex 1/8 75 ISOBOX® Mobil Flex 1/15 37.5 Max. capacity 8 GN 1/1 max. depth 65 mm lengthwise insertion 15 GN 1/1 max. depth 20 mm lengthwise insertion Beading interval Dimensions W × D × H Product code mm 75 mm 590 × 800 × 930 37.5 590 × 800 × 930 0223040 0223041 With stainless steel inner housing with fully welded shelf options. 800 W heating unit not compatible with this model. Without gallery as standard. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. ISOBOX® Mobil Flex – 1-compartment – high version Model Max. capacity Beading interval mm Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 7 ISOBOX® Mobil Flex 1/16 75 16 GN 1/1 max. depth 65 mm lengthwise insertion 75 590 × 800 × 1,530 0223042 With stainless steel inner housing with fully welded shelf options. Only the neutral panel or 800 W heating unit can be used with this model. Without gallery as standard. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. ISOBOX® Mobil Flex – 2 compartments side-by-side Model Max. capacity ISOBOX® Mobil Flex 2/16 75 AP ISOBOX® Mobil Flex 2/30 37.5 AP 2 × 8 = 16 GN 1/1 max. depth 65 mm lengthwise insertion 2 × 15 = 30 GN 1/1 max. depth 20 mm lengthwise insertion Beading interval mm 75 Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 1,100 × 800 × 970 0223043 37.5 1,100 × 800 × 970 0223044 With stainless steel inner housing with fully welded shelf options. 800 W heating unit not compatible with this model. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. ISOBOX® Mobil Flex – 2 compartments one above the other Model Max. capacity Beading interval mm Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code ISOBOX® Mobil Flex/V 2/16 75 2 × 8 = 16 GN 1/1 max. depth 65 mm lengthwise insertion ISOBOX® Mobil Flex/V 2/30 37.5 2 × 15 = 30 GN 1/1 max. depth 20 mm lengthwise insertion 75 590 × 800 × 1,670 0223045 37.5 590 × 800 × 1,670 0223046 With stainless steel inner housing with fully welded shelf options. 800 W heating unit not compatible with this model. Without gallery as standard. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 150 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

151

ISOBOX® Mobil Flex with heat plate – 2 compartments side-by-side Model Max. capacity ISOBOX® Mobil Flex 2/16 75 3HP 2 × 8 = 16 GN 1/1 max. depth 65 mm lengthwise insertion Beading interval Dimensions W × D × H mm 75 mm 1,100 × 800 × 999 ISOBOX® Mobil Flex 2/30 37.5 3HP 2 × 15 = 30 GN 1/1 max. depth 20 mm lengthwise insertion 37.5 1,100 × 800 × 999 Product code 0223083 0223084 With stainless steel inner housing with fully welded shelf options. 800 W heating unit not compatible with this model. Self-regulating heating plate at the top with 3 1/1 GN heating fields, can be switched separately. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Extra hot The integrated heat plate on the top allows food to be kept warm in GN containers for direct serving. ACCESSORIES: ISOBOX® MOBIL FLEX 7 ISOBOX® Mobil Flex – heating unit with digital controls – from 30 to 95°C Model Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code Heating unit D 230/400 All ISOBOX® Flex models except 0223042 451 × 155 × 398 0163553 Heating unit D 230/800 0223042 451 × 155 × 398 0163554 Heating Heating unit D 230/400 Heating unit D 230/800 Stainless steel version. Power kW 0.45 0.85 Electrical connection Protection class 230 V 1N AC 50/60 Hz 230 V 1N AC 50/60 Hz IP22 IP22 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 151

152

ISOBOX® Mobil Flex – cooling unit with digital controls Model Suitable for For ambient temper- atures Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code Cooling unit D 230/150 25°C All ISOBOX® Flex models except 0223042 max. 25°C 456 × 155 × 428 0163590 Cooling unit D 230/150 All ISOBOX® Flex 32°C models max. 32°C 456 × 155 × 478 0164247 Cooling Cooling unit D 230/150 25°C Cooling unit D 230/150 32°C Stainless steel version. Refrigeration capacity Capacity Electrical connection Protection class kW 0.15 0.15 kW 0.24 0.4 230 V 1N AC 50/60 Hz 230 V 1N AC 50/60 Hz IP22 IP22 ISOBOX® Mobil Flex – neutral unit Model 7 Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code Neutral unit D 354 × 62 × 350 0163862 Stainless steel version. 152 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

153

OPTIONS: ISOBOX® MOBIL FLEX 6 Other accessories Additional GN containers or grids can be found in the “Accessories for commercial kitchens” section that starts on page 228. 5 2 4 1 3 Item Model Stainless steel cover Card holder Paper clamp Lockable door All-round bumper strip, top and bottom Gallery, 4-sided Gallery, 3-sided 1 2 3 4 5 6 7* 8* 9* 7 Suitable for 0223040, 0223041 All ISOBOX® Flex models 0223043, 0223044, 0223083, 0223084 All ISOBOX® Flex models 0223043, 0223044, 0223083, 0223084 Eutectic plate All ISOBOX® Flex models HGV transport securing device 0223042, 0223045, 0223046 10* Country-specific mains plugs Options must be selected when ordering and cannot be retrofitted – except for the eutectic plate. * Not shown in the picture. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 153

154

ISOBOX® MOBIL BASIC Perfectly insulated Great insulation ensures the temperature is maintained: low temperature loss and minimal influence on neighbouring compartments. 7 Easy to clean Fully welded shelf options make cleaning a doddle. Website Further product details On top Accessories and options such as a gallery or the eutectic plate round off your ISOBOX®. Eye-catcher The ability to choose the colour of the side panels also makes the ISOBOX® a winner in guest areas. Runs Can be fully adapted to your needs with a wide range of wheel equipment. Your ISOBOX® in your favourite design Design the transport trolley according to your taste or needs, e.g. “traffic red” for trolleys with hot food and “sky blue” for cold food transport. U15230 LIGHT VANILLA U18003 CRYSTAL BLUE U19006 MINT U17005 CARMINE RED U18068 HEAVEN BLUE U19507 IRIS U16009 GOLDEN ORANGE U 15194 ZINC YELLOW U11077 CREAM WHITE U12168 CASHMERE U12257 GRAPHITE U12011 VULCANO R38000 NW CHESTNUT R20315 NW ARTISAN OAK R20128 RU SONOMA LIGHT OAK F79934 CR FERRO BLACK S60036 SX CLASSIC CONCRETE A N T I B A C T E R I A L P R O P E R T I E S LIGHT Light and friendly. STRONG Modern, vibrant and eye-catching. ACHROMATIC Reserved and serious. WOOD Authentic, vibrant and natural. STONE Discreet and modern. 154

155

ISOBOX® Mobil Basic – 1 compartment Model Max. capacity Beading interval mm Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code ISOBOX® Mobil Basic 1/15 37.5 15 GN 1/1 max. depth 20 mm lengthwise insertion 37.5 550 × 730 × 925 0223047 ISOBOX® Mobil Basic 1/30 37.5 30 GN 1/1 max. depth 20 mm lengthwise insertion 37.5 550 × 730 × 1,490 0223048 Basic version with closed rear panel. Not compatible with heating or cooling unit. Choose the Flex version, designed for use with heating or cooling units. With polymer inner housing with fully welded shelf options. Gallery and holder for eutectic plate at additional cost. Other wheel variants are avail- able on page 99. ISOBOX® Mobil Basic – 2 compartments side-by-side Model Max. capacity Beading interval Dimensions W × D × H Product code mm mm 7 ISOBOX® Mobil Basic 2/30 37.5 AP 2 × 15 = 30 GN 1/1 max. depth 20 mm lengthwise insertion 37.5 975 × 730 × 925 0223049 Basic version with closed rear panel. Not compatible with heating or cooling unit. Choose the Flex version, designed for use with heating or cooling units. With polymer inner housing with fully welded shelf options. Gallery and holder for eutectic plate at additional cost. Other wheel variants are avail- able on page 99. ISOBOX® Mobil Basic – 2 compartments one above the other Model Max. capacity Beading interval Dimensions W × D × H Product code mm mm ISOBOX® Mobil Basic/V 2/30 37.5 2 × 15 = 30 GN 1/1 max. depth 20 mm lengthwise insertion 37.5 550 × 730 × 1,640 0223050 Basic version with closed rear panel. Not compatible with heating or cooling unit. Choose the Flex version, designed for use with heating or cooling units. With polymer inner housing with fully welded shelf options. Gallery and holder for eutectic plate at additional cost. Other wheel variants are avail- able on page 99. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 155

156

ACCESSORIES: ISOBOX® MOBIL BASIC 2 6 Other accessories Additional GN containers or grids can be found in the “Accessories for commercial kitchens” section that starts on page 228. 3 1 4 5 7 Suitable for 0223048, 0223050 All ISOBOX® Basic models Item Model 1 2 3 4 5 6 7* 8* HGV transport securing device Gallery, 3-sided/4-sided Paper clamp Card holder Lockable door Stainless steel cover Eutectic plate Country-specific mains plugs Options must be selected when ordering and cannot be retrofitted – except for the eutectic plate. * Not shown in the picture. 156 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

158

8 – MOBIS® BUFFETCARTS Mobis Buffetcart Brings flexibility to breakfast service: compact transport trolley with two compartments for efficient, guest-friendly breakfast service. Available for 40 or 60 trays. P. 159 Mobis Buffetcart Plus The buffet on wheels: individually adapted to your wishes and requirements, with even more storage space and additional options. Available with 3 or 4 compartments. 8 P. 160 Just as you want it Choose the right colour for you from the many modern shades. Clever: the finishes have antibacterial properties for increased hygiene. A N T I B A C T E R A L P R O P E R T I E S U15230 LIGHT VANILLA U18003 CRYSTAL BLUE U19006 MINT U17005 CARMINE RED U18068 HEAVEN BLUE U19507 IRIS U16009 GOLDEN ORANGE U15194 ZINC YELLOW U11077 CREAM WHITE U12168 CASHMERE U12257 GRAPHITE U12011 VULCANO R38000 NW CHESTNUT R20315 NW ARTISAN OAK R20128 RU SONOMA LIGHT OAK F79934 CR FERRO BLACK S60036 SX CLASSIC CONCRETE 158 LIGHT Light and friendly. STRONG Modern, vibrant and eye-catching. ACHROMATIC Reserved and serious. WOOD Authentic, vibrant and natural. STONE Discreet and modern.

159

Variety at breakfast with the Mobis® Buffetcart: A bonus for patients and budgets. Specially designed for use in hospitals and care facilities, the compact transport trolley scores highly with a combination of practical configurations and its attractive design. This saves staff time and provides residents and patients with a high-quality, varied breakfast selection. On top A hook-in GN 1/1 shelf offers additional storage space. Eye-catcher Side panels available in various colours. Hygienic The seamless design makes cleaning extremely easy. Illustration shows optional equipment. Mobis® Buffetcart The Mobis Buffetcart® provides for a contemporary, hospitable breakfast service. Mobis® Buffetcart for 40 GN 1/2 trays Mobis® Buffetcart for 60 GN 1/2 trays Configuration: 2 segments, neutral. Configuration: 3 segments, neutral. Along for the ride The sturdy gallery serves as a push handle and holder for attachments, e.g. waste paper baskets. Robust High-density Black Line tabletop with scratch-re- sistant surface. Storage space 40 inserts for 1/2 GN trays. The 40 mm pitch offers flexibility in distribution. Hard-wearing The sturdy stainless steel base makes this trans- port trolley particularly durable. Tailored to your needs We will be happy to help you find exactly the right equipment. 8 159

160

Everything on board with the Mobis® Buffetcart Plus: The all-round solution for mobile food distribution The innovative solution for meeting individual patient wishes, such as in the distribution and service of breakfast and evening meals. This allows patients to freely select the products and quantities they want – an important step towards reducing food waste. Website Further product details Mobis® Buffetcart Plus for approx. 25 people Mobis® Buffetcart Plus for approx. 40 people Configuration: 2 segments, Configuration: 3 segments, 1 technical compartment. 1 technical compartment. Tailored to you The picture shows equipment options – we will configure the Mobis® Buffetcart individually for you, based on your needs in terms of technology, equipment and decorative surfaces. Please contact us directly! MOBIS® BUFFETCART PLUS: 2 segments plus technical compartment 8 Same features and options as Mobis® Buffetcart Plus with 3 segments. Illustration shows optional equipment. 160

161

MOBIS® BUFFETCART PLUS: 3 segments plus technical compartment Designed by industry for industry: To ensure that our innovative Mobis Buffetcarts best meet all requirements in day-to-day use, we assessed around 1,000 patient cards when designing the transport trolleys. From the technology to the drawer configuration: the Mobis Buffetcart is now a proven companion in hospitals, clinics and care facilities. At hand The frame top provides easy access to portion packs, for example, and also serves as a sneeze guard. Other accessories Protective elements, an attachable shelf or a cutting board and other helpful extras are available on request. Reliably cold The recessed cooling plate offers temperature safety, e.g. for cold cuts. Everything on board Stacking compart- ments for safely transporting plates up to Ø 200 mm. 8 Clean Waste pull-out for transporting waste. Nice and cold Drawers for items requiring refrigeration. Eye-catcher Side panels available in various colours. Flexible configuration The combination of cabinets and drawers is available in several variants, e.g. hot/cold or neutral. Bread drawer For transporting baked goods. Clever: cover plate serves as a cutting board. GN dimensions Matches popular GN dimensions. Moves with ease A fifth, electrically driven wheel ensures that the trolley is easy to manoeuvre. Optionally, the Mobis can also be equipped for use in traction operation. Illustration shows optional equipment. N’Ice & Easy The transport trolley’s patented N’Ice & Easy® cooling system with mains-independent, energy-efficient ice storage ensures that food requiring refrigeration is kept cold for up to 120 min. even without a mains connection. Permanent cooling in mains operation is also possible. Cooling when not connected to the mains during food distribution: virtually silent in mains-independent operation. Does not require large and heavy batteries. No limit to charging cycles due to independent ice storage. Low power consumption. Future-proof refrigerant (R600a). All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 161 161

162

9 – KÖHLER® BANKETTWAGEN Must-haves for every event The Köhler® banquet trolleys bring a timeless design to hot and cold food catering. P. 164 P. 165 P. 166 9 Banquet trolley with fan-assisted heating Variably adjustable temperatures always in view: our classic model keeps items conveniently warm. Banquet trolley with fan-assisted heating and passive cooling compartment Hot at the bottom, cold at the top: our double-decker for all occasions. Banquet trolleys with fan-assisted cooling High-performance cooling with optimum air circulation. P. 166 P. 167 Banquet trolley unheated Outstanding insulating properties to keep your food hot, cold or neutral even without active technology. Accessories All the add-ons: Gallery, GN-grid, eutectic plates. 162 Website Further product details

163

GENERAL FEATURES OF THE KÖHLER® BANQUET TROLLEY Robust and hygienic Optimum cleaning and hygiene proper- ties thanks to stainless steel housing. Easy to clean Tray ladders can be easily removed manually for cleaning. Optimum air circulation Same space – same temper- ature thanks to optimised air circulation. MODEL-SPECIFIC FEATURES Energy efficient Effective insulation ensures temperatures are maintained for a long time even without mains power. Ergonomic Easy to manoeuvre thanks to the vertical push bars – even with the doors open. Secured doors Lockable, automatically latching doors without additional handle. 9 All-round protection Thanks to solid impact protection strips at the top and bottom – even for HGV transport. F u t u r e - p r o o f r e f r i g e r a n t Heating cassette Passive cooling compartment Fan-assisted cooling The heating cassette with humidification tray is easy to remove. Thermal separation of the hot and cold areas. Up to five GN 1/1 can be further cooled using the eutectic plate. Powerful yet energy-saving fan-assisted cooling system with future-proof R290 refrigerant. 163

164

BANQUET TROLLEY – FAN-ASSISTED HEATING Köhler® banquet trolley – fan-assisted heating – lengthwise insertion Model Capacity Insertion dimensions Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BKW 1/14 L-GN-57.5 14 × GN 1/1 530 × 325 100 640 × 775 × 1,308 0163291 BKW 1/20 L-GN-57.5 20 × GN 1/1 530 × 325 100 640 × 775 × 1,653 0163292 Heating BKW 1/14 L-GN-57.5 BKW 1/20 L-GN-57.5 Capacity Electrical connection Protection Temperature control Thermostat setting kW 1.6 1.6 AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz class IPX 4 IPX 4 Variable control Variable control 30-95°C 30-95°C Stainless steel version. Pitch: 57.5 mm. 2 swivel castors with total brakes and 2 fixed castors, Ø 125 mm, in polymer housings. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 9 Köhler® banquet trolley – fan-assisted heating – crosswise insertion Model Capacity Insertion dimensions Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BKW 1/36 B-GN-57.5 36 × GN 1/1 530 × 325 180 795 × 895 × 1,573 0163293 Heating BKW 1/36 B-GN-57.5 Capacity Electrical connection Protection Temperature control Thermostat setting kW 1.6 AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz class IPX 4 Variable control 30-95°C Stainless steel version. Pitch: 57.5 mm. 2 swivel castors with total brakes and 2 fixed castors, Ø 125 mm, in polymer housings. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 164 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

165

BANQUET TROLLEY – WITH FAN-ASSISTED HEATING AND PASSIVE COOLING COMPARTMENT Köhler® banquet trolley – fan-assisted heating/passive cooling – lengthwise insertion Model Capacity Insertion dimensions Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BKW 1/14 L-GN-57.5 +5 PK 14 × GN 1/1 in base + 5 × GN 1/1 in top frame + 1 × eutectic plate GN 1/1 (not included in price) Capacity Electrical connection 530 × 325 95 640 × 775 × 1,857 0163294 Protection class Temperature control Thermostat setting AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz IPX 4 Variable control 30-95°C Heating BKW 1/14 L-GN-57.5 + 5 PK kW 1.6 Stainless steel version. Pitch: 57.5 mm in base, 72 mm in top frame. 2 swivel castors with total brakes and 2 fixed castors, Ø 125 mm, in polymer hous- ings. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Köhler® banquet trolley – fan-assisted heating/passive cooling – crosswise insertion Model Capacity Insertion dimensions Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 9 BKW 1/28 B-GN-57.5 +10 PK 28 × GN 1/1 in base + 10 × GN 1/1 in top frame + 2 × eutectic plate GN 1/1 (not included in price) Capacity Electrical connection 530 × 325 270 795 × 895 × 1,892 0163282 Protection class Temperature control Thermostat setting AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz IPX 4 Variable control 30-95°C Heating BKW 1/28 B-GN-57.5 +10 PK kW 1.6 Stainless steel version. Pitch: 57.5 mm in base, 72 mm in top frame. 2 swivel castors with total brakes and 2 fixed castors, Ø 160 mm. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 165

166

BANQUET TROLLEYS – FAN-ASSISTED COOLING Köhler® banquet trolley – fan-assisted cooling – crosswise insertion F u t u r e - p r o o f r e f r i g e r a n t Model Capacity Insertion dimensions Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BKW 1/40 B-GN-57.5 UK 40 × GN 1/1 530 × 325 200 795 × 895 × 1,872 0163295 Heating BKW 1/40 B-GN-57.5 UK capacity kW capacity R290, CFC-free Refrigeration Refrigeration Power kW Electrical connection Cooling element Protection class Temperature control Thermostat setting 0.35 0.26 AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz IPX 4 Variable control 0–10°C Stainless steel version. Pitch: 57.5 mm in base. 2 swivel castors with total brakes and 2 fixed castors, Ø 160 mm. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. BANQUET TROLLEYS – UNHEATED 9 Köhler® banquet trolley – unheated – lengthwise insertion Model Capacity Insertion dimensions Maximum mm load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BKW 1/23 L-GN-57.5 Neutral 23 × GN 1/1 530 × 325 115 640 × 775 × 1,654 0163345 Stainless steel version. Pitch: 57.5 mm. 2 swivel castors with total brakes and 2 fixed castors, Ø 125 mm, in polymer housings. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 166 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

167

ACCESSORIES: KÖHLER® BANQUET TROLLEYS GN grids Model 1/1 – type A 1/1 – type B 0 3 5 0 3 5 GN 1/1 325 GN 1/1 325 GN 2/1 6.0 7.0 2/1 – type A 0 5 6 7.0 530 Electro-polished, stainless steel version with brushed edges. Wire thickness of frame and struts mm Thickness of lengthwise wires mm Number of lengthwise wires Dimensions W × D mm Product code 3.0 3.0 3.0 20 17 35 530 × 325 01139029 530 × 325 7209535 650 × 530 01139129 Model Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code Gallery 0163291, 0163294, 0163292, 0163345 557 × 717 × 52 0163311 9 Gallery 0163282, 0163293, 0163295 837 × 738 × 52 0163312 Eutectic plate 0163294, 0163282 530 × 325 × 30 0163584 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 167

169

OUR TRAY TRANSPORT CART GUIDE Tailored to you: Let our customer service advise you – we will configure your tray transport cart to meet your individual requirements. Tray transport cart-E Single-walled Tray transport cart-M Modular construction Tray transport cart-V Internally welded Tray transport cart-CS Cook & Serve Special features For insulation systems. Sustainable thanks to exchangeable modules. Suitable for washing devices. Tray types üEN üGN ü½ EN üVeska üInsulation systems üEN üGN ü½ EN üVeska üInsulation systems üEN üGN ü½ EN üVeska üInsulation systems Thermal separation in the interior for hot and cold components. üEN (special trays) üGN ü½ EN üVeska üInsulation systems Tray capacity 20, 24, 30 16, 20, 24, 30, 32, 36, 40 16, 20, 24, 30, 32, 36, 40 20 Intended use Preferred food distribution systems Cooling Insulation Breakfast/lunch/dinner service Cook & Serve No cooling Cook & Freeze Cook & Chill Cook & Freeze Cook & Chill Cook & Serve with long distribution times 1. No cooling 2. Passive cooling 1. No cooling 2. Passive cooling Passive cooling ü ü ü TRAY TRANSPORT CART-E & TRAY TRANSPORT CART-CS 10 Tray transport cart-CS This system is designed for Cook & Serve food distri- bution with long transport times. The special middle panel in the interior creates a thermal separation so that hot and cold food can maintain their tempera- ture on a special tray. The cold food is also cooled via eutectic plates that slot in. Tray transport cart-E Our tray transport cart-E is particularly suitable for transporting insulated systems with special trays and cloches, which have their own insulation. A double- walled tray transport cart is therefore no longer necessary. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 169

170

TRAY TRANSPORT CART-M & TRAY TRANSPORT CART-V Model tray transport cart-M shown. Also representative of tray transport cart-V. Long life cycle High-quality, robust stainless steel throughout the outer and inner housing ensures maximum durability. Ergonomic Thanks to the full length push bar, users can operate at a handle height to suit them. Passive cooling Eutectic plates can be inserted into the middle panel to keep food components cold for several hours. 10 All-round housing seal Dust-proof closure and low temperature losses thanks to an all-round seal. Image shows optional equipment. Perfectly insulated The double-walled, insulated housing maintains the temperatures inside for a long time. Fully welded tray racks No dirt in the shelves. For the easiest cleaning imaginable. Solid impact protection The all-round impact protection on the chassis and top protects the transport trolley from damage. Transport-safe door lock The 2-point locking system ensures that the doors remain closed, even during HGV transport. Tray transport cart-V: Highest hygiene standards Welding in the interior of the transport trolley enables thorough cleaning in a trolley washing device – the height of hygiene. T r a y t r a n s p o r t c a r t - V Tray transport cart-M: Sustainable modular construction The rear and side panels, trolley top, hinged door and push bar are replaceable. This means that individual parts can be replaced if damaged – which is particularly economical. T r a y t r a n s p o r t c a r t - M Tray transport cart-V With fully welded interior. 170 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

171

OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES Wheel variant Lockable doors We offer the right wheel for every transport requirement. A triangular lock enables safe transport and prevents unauthorised access. Docking mechanism and towing device Directionally stable traction operation due to the towing device. HGV transport securing device Paper clamp Card holder Serves to protect on-site handrails or to secure loads on the HGV. Practical clamp for station cards or accom- panying papers. 4 polymer buttons for the cards in different sizes. 10 Laser engraving Gallery Labelling cone Our individual laser engraving options for your tray transport cart, e.g. trolley number. For safe transport of baskets with glasses or similar on the trolley top. Different coloured labelling cones make it easier for you to assign the transport trolleys. ACCESSORIES Baskets All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ Eutectic plates and much more... 171

173

Food distribution in retirement homes demands a great deal of flexibility. The residents are all very different and have their own individual needs. Energetic residents want to prepare their own meals, others eat together in the dining room and bedridden residents can only take their meals in their own room. The selection and arrangement of our products optimally meets these requirements. FOOD DISTRIBUTION IN RETIREMENT HOMES PORTIONING The arrangement of the transport trolleys and furniture enables efficient portioning by serving from both sides. Portioning is carried out in the kitchen area by specialist kitchen staff, guaranteeing fast and skilful work processes. KEEPING FOOD HOT AND COLD The ISOBOX® is then loaded with the portioned food. This is kept either cold or warm, as required. DISTRIBUTING Our system enables rapid distribution of the food, as cold and hot components can be transported together and the trolley can be easily pushed through the aisles thanks to its optimum design. 11 SERVING With our food distribution system, nursing staff are only responsible for final serving, and do not have to worry about portioning the food. This leaves more time for actually caring for residents. Diners can look forward to fast, reliable meal distribution with meals at the optimum temperature. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 173

174

EXAMPLE ARRANGEMENT OF PORTIONING STATION Example of an efficient portioning station configuration in a retirement home Website Further product details Heated platform dispenser The advantage: rectangular porcelain norm crockery can be used, which offers optimum use of space and is particularly suitable for senior citizens thanks to the high rim. Mobile portioning table Here the trays are positioned and can be loaded from both sides. The mobile bain maries can be pushed under the table to save space. 11 174 Mobile bain maries The transport trolley arrange- ment opposite provides for the greatest possible efficiency in meal portioning. Stacking equipment for PN lids After portioning on the tray, the PN crockery is fitted with the matching lid.

176

COMPACT FOOD DISTRIBUTION EXAMPLE ARRANGEMENT For efficient food distribution, portioning must be as smooth and simple as possible. This is because there is a wide range of requirements to take into account, from the right choice of food to temperature safety and punctuality of delivery. It does not always have to be personnel-intensive food distribution on a conveyor belt, but can also be a serving station as in the example shown here. The major advantage: portioning can be done by just one person. Example arrangement of our Hupfer transport carts to form a complete serving station Cutlery and tray trolleys Product details p. 65. Platform dispenser for cups, for example Product details p. 114. 11 176 Tray/basket dispenser Product details p. 118. BENEFITS AT A GLANCE: No production kitchen required: just min. 1 × 230V socket. Portioning can be done by just one person. Portion completion in just one minute. Catering for up to 200 people. Ergonomic working height. Smooth-running portioning table.

178

12 – FOOD DISTRIBUTION WITH CONVEYOR TECHNOLOGY Website Further product details The solution when catering for many people To ensure that everything fits together seamlessly, our solutions for food distribution with conveyor technology ensure optimum routines from portioning to distribution. This creates efficient process chains, guarantees compliance with required temperatures and increases occupational safety for your employees through routine handling. As a specialist in this field, we take into account an extremely wide range of requirements and offer solutions that are individually tailored to your needs for every distribution system, whether Cook & Freeze, Cook & Chill or Cook & Serve. 12 P. 180 P. 182 Cook & Serve food distribution From the kitchen straight to the guest: with our solutions, hot food stays hot and cold food stays cold. Cook & Chill and Cook & Freeze food distri- bution Discover our solutions for optimum food regeneration. 178

179

Cook & Serve food distribution Freshly cooked and straight to your guests: Cook & Serve systems place high demands on processes, requiring consistent compliance with the necessary temperatures for hot and cold components at the same time. Hupfer offers you a wide range of products for a reliable all-round solution. Cook & Freeze and Cook & Chill food distribution For food distribution systems involving food that is chilled or deep-frozen after preparation and then regenerated, our Plug & Cool meal make-up conveyor with integrated cooling circuit offers innovative and efficient complete solutions. Advantage: Portioning at room temperature – benefiting staff while reducing operating costs. 12 179

182

COOK & FREEZE AND COOK & CHILL FOOD DISTRIBUTION PRACTICAL EXAMPLE Practical example from lunch catering This cart configuration is just one of many possible arrangements. Some highlights of the transport carts shown here are presented in more detail in this section. P. 190 P. 188 Pre-portioned cold components Options: CoolMultiMobil® or Coolport®, induction docking station with fan-assisted cooling, Pre-portioning EN trolley. P. 170 Food distribution Tray transport cart, modular construction, Tray transport cart, fully welded. P. 189 Alternative all-in-one solution Induction cart. 12 E x c l u s i v e l y a t H u p f e r 182 P. 184 Meal make-up conveyor optionally available with integrated cooling circuit The transport carts are connected to the conveyor cooling circuit in the Plug & Cool system so that the carts themselves do not require cooling. Further option: also available with air curtain cooling for cooling during conveyor belt operation.

184

MEAL MAKE-UP CONVEYOR WITH COOLING CIRCUIT FOR COOK & CHILL AND COOK & FREEZE The Plug & Cool meal make-up conveyor The system is made up of three integrated components: meal make-up conveyor, Coolports® and suitable trolleys. The Plug & Cool meal make-up conveyor has its own future-proof cooling circuit, which is attached to the existing refrigeration unit and which provides the connected Coolports® and inserted trolleys with the required refrigeration capacity at a central point. COOL ADVANTAGES AT A GLANCE E x c l u s i v e l y a t H u p f e r TAILOR-made: with custom belt configuration, connections can be positioned anywhere on the belt – we’ll find the best solution for your space. MOVABLE: the arrangement of the transport carts can be changed in no time with no need for tools thanks to optional quick-release fasteners – for example, if there are differences in morning and lunch- time procedures. EMPLOYEE-FRIENDLY: as the meal make-up conveyor offers an integrated cooling circuit, work can be done at normal room temperatures. SUITABLE FOR FUTURE USE: the cooling system refrigerant is based on an environmentally friendly brine base, which is not only safe to use in food environments, but also eliminates the need for regular testing, which is obligatory for other refrigerants. EASY TO CLEAN: the optional quick-release fasteners enable tool-free coupling and uncoupling – docked transport carts can therefore be moved very easily for cleaning purposes. LOW NOISE: Almost silent operation as only one system runs instead of multiple refrigeration units. Quick connection, no tools required Coolport coupling The new quick-release fasteners make coupling and uncou- pling possible without any tools whatsoever. Up to two Coolports can be coupled to one connection. 12 184

185

COOLPORTS®: NEXT-GENERATION INDUCTION DOCKING STATIONS Cool head Top circulation Powerhouse Even at high ambient temperatures of up to 25°C, cold foods are reliably cooled. Fans in the lower area of the Cool- ports ensure reliable cold circulation. Powerful yet energy-saving heat exchangers guarantee efficient cooling of the Coolports. Simple technology Maintenance-friendly Hygienically designed Each Coolport is equipped with connections for power and cooling supply. The swivelling air deflector door in the rear panel makes it easier to clean the heat exchanger and allows you to use a hose for cleaning. The open floor and mobility of the Coolports create ideal conditions for cleaning. 12 185 185

186

Coolport® – induction docking station with fan-assisted cooling for GN container food serving trolleys Model For trolley Temperature Electrical connection control Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code COP/UK SPA/O+ KK with top frame 3-12°C AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz 1,325 × 1,070 × 1,468 0164291 Stainless steel version. Also available with compressor cooling for meal make-up conveyors without integrated cooling circuit. Trolley – GN container food serving trolley Model For trolley Capacity Capacity of top frame Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SPA/O 3/21 A-3GN BP with top frame 21 runners GN 1/1 3 × GN 1/1 150 1,171 × 724 × 1,174 0164329 Stainless steel version. With floor plate. 3 compartments. To hold GN 1/1 containers and their subdivisions with pre-cooled meals. Pitch 75 mm. 12 186 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer. com/en/

187

Coolport® – induction docking station with fan-assisted cooling for crockery and tray dispensers Model For trolley Temperature Electrical connection control Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code COP/UK BD/ BPN KK Crockery and tray dispenser 3-12°C AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz 1,265 × 1,190 × 1,544 0164312 Stainless steel version. Also available with compressor cooling for meal make-up conveyors without integrated cooling circuit. Trolley – dispenser for porcelain norm crockery Model Platform mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BPN 4-K 510 × 365 160 741 × 547 × 923 0164314 Stainless steel version. Open design. Trolley – dispenser for polymer items and trays Model Platform mm Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BD/O 75-53 812 × 595 240 1,078 × 751 × 909 0164313 Stainless steel version. Coolport® – induction docking station with fan-assisted cooling Model Temperature control Electrical connection Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 12 COP/UK RWG KK 3-12°C AC 220-230V N PE 50/60 Hz 817 × 1,373 × 1,907 0163887 Stainless steel version. Also available with compressor cooling for meal make-up conveyors without integrated cooling circuit. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 187

188

Trolley – high gastronorm trolley – without base plate Model Capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code RWG 1/36 GN 75-B-U 36 × GN 1/1 – 18 × GN 2/1 180 659 × 739 × 1,662 0112535 Stainless steel version. To hold GN 1/1 containers and their subdivisions with pre-cooled meals. Base plate 0164350 required for use in Coolport®. Pitch 75 mm. Base plate for GN trolley RWG 1/36 Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 671 × 586 × 30 0164350 Stainless steel version. For retrofitting GN trolley 0112535 for insertion into a Coolport®. Pre-portioning EN trolley – crosswise insertion – 1 compartment Model Insertion dimensions Number of runners mm Capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code VTW 1/24 EN 115-B-U EN 530 × 370 12 24 EN trays or 24 EN baskets 120 659 × 819 × 1,652 0113065 12 Stainless steel version. For storage or provision of pre-portioned cold components. No trolley for a Coolport®. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-re- sistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Shelf pitch 115 mm. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Base plate for pre-portioning trolley Model Suitable for Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code VTW-ELB 0113065 Pre-portioning EN trolley 0113065 557 × 534 × 24 0164353 Stainless steel version. Base plate for retrofitting a pre-portioning EN trolley for use in a Coolport® induction docking station. 188 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

189

F O O D S E R V I C E S Y S T E M S Perfect food distribution systems for over 30 years! We have been providing numerous social institutions throughout the world with innovative solutions for food distribution systems for communal catering for over 30 years. Our systems are not only impressive, with their easy handling and aesthetics, but have also proven themselves to be functional and meet hygiene and food temperature requirements in day-to-day use. We make it possible to integrate our systems seamlessly into existing portioning processes thanks to the right logistics and necessary expertise of a specialist! ContactLine Selective and economical heating InductLine The high-efﬁciency food distribution system Contact heating and temperature sensor technology Targeted heating saves energy Combines innovative and energy-saving regeneration processes with the delight of a perfect meal. With the diverse product range from MenüMobil, you can have the right system for any application area: C l a s s i c L i n e I n d u c o o k I n d u c t L i n e A i r L i n e C o n t a c t L i n e P r o fi L i n e U n i q u e & i n n o v a t i v e C l a s s i c L i n e S i m p l e & p i o n e e r i n g R e ﬁ n e d i n d u c t i o n t e c h n o l o g y I n d i v i d u a l t e m p e r a t u r e c o n t r o l S e l e c t i v e & e c o n o m i c a l h e a t i n g P r o f e s s i o n a l f o o d s e r v i c e F O O D S E R V I C E S Y S T E M S F O O D S E R V I C E S Y S T E M S F O O D S E R V I C E S Y S T E M S F O O D S E R V I C E S Y S T E M S F O O D S E R V I C E S Y S T E M S F O O D S E R V I C E S Y S T E M S MenüMobil Food Service Systems GmbH D r. G u s t a v - M a r k t - We g 1 8 | A - 6 4 0 1 I n z i n g | Ti r o l Te l e f o n + 4 3 / ( 0 ) 5 2 3 8 / 8 8 6 6 1 | F a x + 4 3 / ( 0 ) 5 2 3 8 / 8 8 7 7 8 w w w. m e n u - m o b i l . c o m | o f f i c e @ m e n u - m o b i l . c o m A H U P F E R G R O U P C O M PA N Y : F O O D S E R V I C E S Y S T E M S m o c . l i b o m - u n e m 189

191

Portioning, storing and serving cold foods With our CoolMultiMobil, you can keep food components requiring refrigeration safely cold throughout the entire cold chain. This means that the CoolMultiMobil not only achieves a higher level of temperature safety during food distribution, but also has many other benefits thanks to state-of-the-art technology and optimum handling properties. 1 Serving variety Variable loading enables a high- quality and varied range of food to be served. 3 Efficient and future-proof Thanks to fan-assisted cooling, the CoolMultiMobil ensures constant temperature distribution over several hours on all levels. R290 future-proof refrigerant is used for cooling. 2 Space saver Over 400 portions can be prepared when using quadran- gular PN crockery. 4 Hygienic The support ledge frames, base plates and air baffles can be easily removed for cleaning without the need for tools. 5 Ergonomic Thanks to ergonomic, contin- uous push bars, a comfortable removal height and smooth-run- ning wheels. 6 Saves expensive storage capacity Temporary storage in a cost-intensive cold store is no longer necessary thanks to the in-built cooling system. CoolMultiMobil – fan-assisted cooling – air curtain cooling Model Runners Capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code CMM UK 2 × 13 26 × EN or GN 1/1 lengthwise insertion (selection in advance) 26 runners total e.g. 1/4 porcelain norm containers = 416 pieces Total: 320 per insert: 12 1,114 × 798 × 1,973 0164476-VK Cooling Refrigerant Cooling Refrigeration capacity Power Electrical connection Protection class R290, CFC-free Active fan-assisted cooling with cold air curtain 1.04 kW 0.85 kW AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz IPX3 Stainless steel version. For holding pre-portioned food components in EN or GN format. Frames included. Pitch for shelves: 75 mm. 2 swivel castors with brakes, 2 fixed castors Ø 160 mm. 12 Equipment options 2 frames with Euronorm runners 2 frames with Gastronorm runners LED lighting Exchange shutters for 2 lockable shutters (1 per compartment) Cannot be ordered separately. Model Specification Product code 26 pairs of L-brackets for lengthwise insertion 26 pairs of L-brackets for lengthwise insertion CMM 26EN CMM 26GN CMM LED MON CMM SHUTTER LOCK 0172020002 0172020003 0172020020 0172020032 191 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

192

POWER DISPENSER Tightly sealed The double-walled insulated lid with special seal and additional hinges reliably insulates the interior – without inefficient temperature losses. Frugal A low wattage of 1.84 kW is sufficient for our power dispenser. This means that 2 power dispensers can be operated on one 230 V 16 A line. 12 12 192 Perfectly insulated High-quality all-round insulation ensures efficiency and minimal energy consumption. Powerhouse The power dispenser heats the interior to up to 130°C, causing the wax in the pellets to liquefy. The hot pellets then effectively work to maintain the food temperatures – even during long transport journeys.

193

A dream team: our power dispenser and the plate dispenser are a perfect match. The plate dispenser preheats the crockery and, thanks to the extra hot wax pellets, the temperature is reliably maintained. This creates safe process chains and satisfied guests. Power dispenser – fan-assisted heating Model Pellet dimensions for plates Ø mm Number of dish stacks Max. capacity Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code PSUH 2/26 260 2 Approx. 80-84 stainless steel pellets 140 993 × 633 × 1,037 0163974 Heating Heating PSUH 2/26 Power kW 1.84 Electrical connection Protection class Pellet temperature Temperature control Thermostat setting AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz IPX 5 max. 130°C Fixed 138°C Stainless steel version. For wax pellets. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Plate dispenser – fan-assisted heating/100°C Model Crockery Ø mm Number of dish stacks Max. capacity without lid Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code TE/UH 2/19-26 VC 190 – 260 2 130 crockery items 140 961 × 512 × 972 0161590 Heating Heating TE/UH 2/19-26 VC Power module Power kW 2.0 Electrical connection Crockery temperature Thermostat Temperature control AC 220-230 V N PE 50/60 Hz max. 100°C setting 30-130°C Variable control Stainless steel version. The capacity depends on the stacking height of the crockery. 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, corrosion-resistant, 2 of which have total brakes. Included in delivery: 2 transparent lids, single-walled, flat. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 12 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 193

195

Thermally insulated tray transport cart Model Insertion Tray capacity Cabinets type Hinged doors Number of eutectic plates (option- al) Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code TTW/CS 1/20 EN 115-B PK Crosswise insertion 20 EN special trays cold/hot 1 1 4 798 × 947 × 1,606 0163879 Stainless steel version. For thermally-insulated accommodation of ready-portioned hot and cold foods on special Euronorm trays in the Cook & Serve system. Pitch 115 mm. 2 swivel castors with brakes and 2 fixed castors, Ø 160 mm, zinc-plated housing. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Divided tray for tray transport cart-CS Model Suitable for Temperature resistance Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code TAB EN- 1/1 GRP Gran-A83 get Rectangular porcelain norm crockery -40°C to +140°C 530 × 370 × 17 0163356 Fibreglass-reinforced polymer version. For use in thermally separated tray transport carts for Cook & Serve food distribution. Eutectic plate for tray transport cart-CS Model Temperature application range Specification Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code KP PP 656/182/34 ligr Polyethylene version. Washing device suitable. -15°C to +95°C With finger grip 656 × 182 × 34 0163959 12 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer. com/en/ 195

196

13 – CONVEYOR TECHNOLOGY Our conveyor technology offers the “flow” you want With conveyor technology from Hupfer, planners and users can draw from a wide range of individual modules. All components can be combined in a way that creates the optimum solution for the available space. Effective solutions can be implemented with both cord and belt conveyors. With our crockery return belts, the crockery safely finds its way back to the kitchen. 13 P. 198 P. 198 P. 204 Meal make-up conveyor with belt Meal make-up conveyor with cord Flexible food distribution for individual crockery items and trays. Ideal for transporting GN and EN trays. Crockery return belt Dirty crockery can even be transported back around corners. 196

197

Meal make-up conveyors For perfectly coordinated processes: If the meal make-up conveyor has been well thought out, the individual work steps dovetail seamlessly. Not only can errors be minimised through practised, routine handling, our complete systems also make daily work much more efficient. Crockery return belts The return of used crockery also needs to be well thought out: with our solutions, dirty crockery finds its way from the dining room back to the kitchen in the most efficient way possible – along a straight route or even around corners. We have numerous options to simplify daily work routines, for example, automatic tray stacking. 13 197 197 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

198

EQUIPMENT OPTIONS FOR OUR MEAL MAKE-UP CONVEYORS Meal make-up conveyor with cord Rotary table shelf Rotary table above the belt housing for patient cards or laptops. Universal storage space Here, patient cards, for example, can be easily stored at the begin- ning of the belt. Additional shelf Various cooking utensils such as ladles can be stored here. The shelf can be permanently positioned on the left or right, at the front or back, up to a maximum of 300 mm from the end of the belt. Mobile installation As an option, we offer our belt with roller equipment, which simplifies cleaning and provides more flexibility for subsequent positional adjustments. Our standard option offers belt system legs with ergonomic height adjustment of ± 20 mm and additional selectable floor fixing attachment. Sockets Additional sockets for connecting Hupfer periph- eral equipment, such as heated plate dispensers, see p. 112. Base Polymer louvred shelf as base for practical storage of large containers, for example. Other shelves available on request. 13 Website Further product details Meal make-up conveyor with belt The equipment options shown for the cord version also apply to our belt version. 198 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

199

Website Further product details Individual planning Please contact us for detailed advice in line with your requirements. Fold-down shelf A rail system on both sides of this shelf allows for flexible positioning of the shelf along the entire length of the belt. Mechanical limit rocker switch This stops the belt automatically as soon as a tray touches the rocker. Once the tray is removed, the belt restarts automatically. Alternative: photo-electric limit switch If the tray passes over the sensor built into the belt housing, the stop- start mechanism takes effect. 13 Belt control This is where the belt really gets going – START-STOP switch, speed regulator and emergency stop button are installed on the front side. Illustration shows optional equipment. 199 Bumper strip Lengthwise impact protection on both sides helps to keep the belt in good condition. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

200

STANDARD EQUIPMENT FOR MEAL MAKE-UP CONVEYORS Basic equipment Technical data Conveyor Cord version 1 main switch, 1 START button, 1 STOP button, 1 EMERGENCY STOP button, 1 potentiometer for speed control Conveyor length minus 500 mm in the tray return and 50 mm in the removal area Cord material: polyurethane, green, exchangeable Cord spacing: 180 mm Diameter: 12 mm Belt guide elements HDPE 25/25/19, black, exchangeable – guarantees a stable conveying direction Maximum load 100 N/m Standard lengths of meal make-up conveyors: stationary/mobile version: 3,000-13,000 mm. Other lengths on request. Belt version Standard dimensions W × D × H mm 6,000 × 500 × 900 9,000 × 500 × 900 12,000 × 500 × 900 6,000 × 500 × 900 1 main switch, 1 START button, 1 STOP button, 1 EMERGENCY STOP button, 1 potentiometer for speed control Conveyor length minus 250 mm in the tray return and 200 mm in the removal area Belt width: 300 mm Maximum load 100 N/m Belt material: polyester fabric and PVC coating, white, exchangeable 9,000 × 500 × 900 12,000 × 500 × 900 Standard lengths of meal make-up conveyors: Stationary version: 2,000-13,000 mm, mobile version: 3,000-7,000 mm. Other lengths on request. Electrical sys- tem Polymer switch cabinet, depending on number of sockets, number of motors and electrical variants Sockets Protection class Electrical connection Total connected load Basic design without sockets On request, at additional cost: various 230 V/400 V plug versions, depending on type F/CEE plug design IP X5 without sockets: 230 V ~ 50 Hz NPE with sockets: 400 V 3 ~ 50 Hz NPE 0.12 kW without sockets For conveyor belts with sockets, the total power is dependent on the type and number of consumers attached to the sockets Motor Power Speed range 1 motor for straight, stationary conveyors up to 13 m in length Helical bevel geared motor 0.12 kW with soft start Variable control from 4 to 18 m/min Protection class IP X5 Heat class F Stainless steel version. Hygienic and self-supporting construction, modular design consisting of screwed-on belt segments, on pedestals made of stainless steel square tube set with height-adjustable polymer screw feet or as mobile design on wheels. 13 200 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

201

EQUIPMENT OPTIONS: MEAL MAKE-UP CONVEYORS Model Material Dimensions W × D × H mm Mobile design: Castors Max. 7 m for belt version and 12 m for cord version. Mobile thanks to Ø 125 mm swivel castors, with total brake, polymer housing, polymer wheel with stainless steel ball bearing, according to DIN 18867-8, including stainless steel bracing set between the belt system legs Floor fixing attachment for standard floor feet Stainless steel 105 × 75 × 52 Mechanical limit rocker switch integrated in standard belt Photo-electric limit switch built into the belt housing Bumper strip on both sides, lengthwise Polymer 60 × 20 Rotary table shelf Flexible positioning – max. 300 mm from the beginning or end of the belt Stainless steel 500 × 300 × 530 Hook-in shelf incl. rail system Stainless steel 500 × 300 × 530 Fold-down shelf Stainless steel 500 × 300 × 530 13 201 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

202

Model Material Tray shelf for cord version Dimensions W × D × H mm 250 × 500/ 500 × 500 Universal drawer Stainless steel 480 × 420 × 230 Base with louvred shelf Polymer grid Additional foot switch for starting/stopping the conveyor Additional start/stop switch Flexible positioning along the belt Additional emergency stop button Flexible positioning along the belt Additional socket Schuko, 230V, 16A, IP44 on one or both sides 13 202 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

204

PRACTICAL EXAMPLE: CROCKERY RETURN BELT Our crockery return belts can be designed to your specific needs – distances from the dining room to the kitchen can also be configured for you, even around corners. Trays with used crockery return efficiently via our system. Sorting check Reliable stop for trays that have not been cleared. Mechanical or visual version available as an option. For conveyors with automatic tray stacking. Photo-electric limit switch This is used to stop the belt automatically as soon as a tray triggers the sensor. Once the tray is removed, the belt restarts automatically. Alternative: Mechanical limit rocker switch Here, the same stop-start system takes effect as soon as a tray makes contact with the rocker. For conveyors without automatic tray stacking. Tray dispenser Our open tray dispensers are ideally matched to the SGR belt system. Product details can be found in the section “Stacking equipment” on p. 118. Docking mechanism Tray dispensers are safely coupled to the SGR belt for smooth and automated transfer of empty trays. With this version, there is no need for a limit switch. Tapered belt housing The tapered section of the belt, which goes from 500 mm to 400 mm in width, allows easy ergonomic access to the rear basket shelves. 13 Magnetic cutlery take-off. 204 Belt control 4 different control configura- tions are available according to the configuration of your conveyor. The following are included as standard: 1 main switch, 1 start button, 1 stop button, 1 EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton, 1 potentiometer for speed control. Tray guides All tray sizes can be guided here. Further additional options • Magnetic cutlery take-off (automatic collection of cutlery from the tray and transfer to a cutlery soak sink (Product code 0161750)). • Sound/screening tunnel (contamination-free guidance through clean areas possible). • Emergency stop button. • Queue-clocked circuit. • Sockets. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

205

Website Further product details Basket shelf Used to hold crockery washing baskets and for further sorting of crockery. Available for 3, 4 or 5 baskets (510 × 510 mm). Individual planning Please contact, us for detailed advice in line with your requirements and the space you have available. Curves 90° or 180° curve, equipped with a cord (Ø 15mm), with two lateral stainless steel and polymer guides to optimally take the trays through the curves. Further customer-specific curves possible depending on require- ments e.g. 15°/30°/45°/60°. Cords Polyurethane cord, green, belt distance 180 mm, belt guide elements HDPE 25/25/19, black, exchangeable. 1) Straight conveyor section. 2) Curves 70° and above. Queue-clocked circuit The queue-clocked circuit ensures a smooth and optimised passage of the trays over the entire conveyor. 13 Base with discharge chute This allows you to easily separate waste in an environmentally conscious way at the beginning of the conveyor system. Illustration shows optional equipment. 205 Collecting pan Optional pan for collecting liquids below the tray return. Connection pipe (Ø 50 mm) for an additional disposal line is available. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

206

14– BUILT-IN APPLIANCES FOR FOOD SERVING COUNTERS Individual advice Many of our solutions can also be retrofitted into your food serving counter. We would be happy to review the options together with you. Just tell us what you want. Attractive food presentation for your guests Serving food that guests can enjoy is a key focus of kitchens. Presenting meals professionally at the optimum temperature and in an attractive way not only requires good kitchen staff but also needs equally effective technical solutions. P. 208 P. 210 P. 211 Therma Dry Hot and cold plate Hotplate Therma Dry impresses with attractive presentation, ergonomic handling and efficient operation. Thanks to the fast switching time, the hot and cold plate can be used at any time of the day – saving costs and space. 14 Our hot plate stands out thanks to its short heating times and reliable temperatures. P. 214 Incounter dispenser P. 217 Counter construction Securely installed in a food serving counter for plates, cups, baskets, etc. Our partner Trak combines your built-in appliances to form a holistic food serving counter. 206

208

THERMA DRY 1 Low power consumption Therma Dry consumes up to 63% less energy than a conventional bain-marie. 4 EASY CLEANING The front loading flaps can be removed very easily. This makes cleaning the Ceran® glass surfaces even easier. 2 PERFECT TEMPERATURES Due to the uniform heating with infrared technology, the food maintains a constant temperature – without any reheating. 5 GREATER SAFETY WHEN WORKING Therma Dry is operated entirely without water. This minimises the risk of injury from hot steam and makes handling much more convenient for employees. 3 EFFICIENT OPERATION Therma Dry can be used immediately without preheating. GN containers with food are conveniently inserted instead of awkwardly hooked in from above. 6 NO WATER LINE Therma Dry offers great flexi- bility in positioning, as it does not require a peripheral water line, just a 230 V connection. THE BENEFITS AT A GLANCE 6 3 % e n e r g y s a v i n g Optimum food presentation Simply efficient Ideal handling 14 208 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

209

Therma Dry with wide rim – for direct attachment of gantry lamp modules Model GN size V/kW Energy consump- WHB TD 1/1 mTR fWB EW1 WHB TD 2/1 mTR fWB EW1 WHB TD 3/1 mTR fWB EW1 WHB TD 4/1 mTR fWB EW1 WHB TD 5/1 mTR fWB EW1 1/1 2/1 3/1 4/1 5/1 230/0.41 230/0.82 230/1.23 230/1.64 230/2.05 tion kWh 0.41 0.82 1.23 1.64 2.05 Therma Dry with narrow rim – available with gantry lamp modules as an option* Model GN size V/kW Energy consump- WHB TD 1/1 mTR EW1 WHB TD 2/1 mTR EW1 WHB TD 3/1 mTR EW1 WHB TD 4/1 mTR EW1 WHB TD 5/1 mTR EW1 1/1 2/1 3/1 4/1 5/1 230/0.41 230/0.82 230/1.23 230/1.64 230/2.05 tion kWh 0.41 0.82 1.23 1.64 2.05 * The gantry lamp modules are mounted on the adjacent food serving counter – not on the Therma Dry. Dimensions W × D × H mm 536 × 635 × 402 868 × 635 × 402 1,200 × 635 × 402 1,532 × 635 × 402 1,864 × 635 × 402 Dimensions W × D × H mm 359 × 635 × 402 691 × 635 × 402 1,023 × 635 × 402 1,355 × 635 × 402 1,687 × 635 × 402 Product code 8900301 8900302 8900303 8900304 8900305 Product code 8900406 8900407 8900408 8900409 8900410 Website Further product details 14 209 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

210

HOT AND COLD PLATE 2 SPACE & COST SAVINGS For hot and cold food service – saving space and costs. 1 TIME SAVING The hot and cold plate impresses thanks to its fast switching times. The plate can cool from +140°C to -5°C in just 45 minutes. 4 EFFICIENT The hot and cold plate consumes just 750 Wh of power to heat up from -5°C to +140°C. Model shows counter as optional equipment. More information on p. 217. Hot and cold plate 3 FUTURE-PROOF We use the refrigerant R290, which has long-term approval in accordance with the EU F-Gas Regulation. t o - 5 ° C + 1 4 0 ° C 5 DIGITAL CONTROL Controls directly at the counter allow for flexible setting of the desired temperatures. Website Further product details Model GN size Surface V/kW Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code KWP 1/1 GLA KA EW1 KWP 2/1 GLA KA EW1 KWP 3/1 GLA KA EW1 KWP 3/1 GLA KA EW1 KWP 1/1 DEK KA EW1 KWP 2/1 DEK KA EW1 KWP 3/1 DEK KA EW1 KWP 4/1 DEK KA EW1 1/1 2/1 3/1 4/1 1/1 2/1 3/1 4/1 Ceran® glass, black 230/1.84 330 × 530 × 200 Ceran® glass, black 230/1.84 660 × 530 × 200 Ceran® glass, black 230/2.07 990 × 530 × 200 Ceran® glass, black 230/2.42 1,320 × 530 × 200 Dekton®, black Dekton®, black Dekton®, black Dekton®, black 230/1.84 230/1.84 230/2.07 230/2.42 330 × 530 × 200 660 × 530 × 200 990 × 530 × 200 1,320 × 530 × 200 8900213 8900217 8900237 8900306 8900318 8900225 8900226 8900227 Refrigeration capacity: 340 Watt, ready to plug in with cooling element, future-proof refrigerant: R290. Connection for central refrigeration system on request. 14 Hotplate 210 Model GN size Surface V/kW WHP 2/1 GLA EW1 WHP 3/1 GLA EW1 WHP 4/1 GLA EW1 WHP 5/1 GLA EW1 2/1 3/1 4/1 5/1 Ceran® glass, black Ceran® glass, black Ceran® glass, black Ceran® glass, black 230/0.6 230/0.9 230/1.2 230/1.5 Dimensions W × D × H mm 660 × 530 × 43 990 × 530 × 43 1,320 × 530 × 43 1,650 × 530 × 43 Product code 0164397 0164398 0164399 0164400 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

211

1 SHORT HEATING TIMES The hotplate is ready for use in no time at all. 2 FLEXIBLE USE Flexible and fast temperature control via the thermostat means a very wide variety of dishes can be served. 4 EASY CLEANING The flat surfaces make cleaning the counter very easy. GANTRY LAMP MODULES 2 INNOVATIVE Thanks to energy-efficient infrared heaters, the food reliably maintains its temperature without any loss whatsoever. 1 FOOD QUALITY Special infrared light waves are absorbed particularly well by the food as well as reducing moisture loss. t o U p 5 0 % 4 ENERGY SAVINGS Compared to conventional gantry lamp modules, our innovative gantry lamp modules achieve energy savings of up to 50%. HOTPLATE 3 DIGITAL CONTROL Controls directly at the counter allow for flexible setting of the desired temperatures. t o + 3 0 ° C + 9 0 ° C Website Further product details 3 COMFORTABLE WORKING The very low level of heat lost from the gantry lamp modules and a maximum surface heat-up temperature of 50°C make working comfortable and safe. 5 LIGHTING TO PROMOTE SALES State-of-the-art LEDs provide optimum lighting, maximising the impact and appeal of the food on display. 14 211 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

212

GANTRY LAMP MODULE DESIGNS EYE-CATCHER Something else that helps present meals in their best light is the matching design of the housing and sneeze guard featured by the gantry lamp modules. THERE ARE THREE DIFFERENT DESIGNS AVAILABLE TO CHOOSE FROM Optima design Horizon design Horizon 02 design 14 Gantry lamp modules Model GN size Design V/kW Energy consump- tion kWh WB 2/1 WB 3/1 WB 4/1 WB 5/1 2/1 3/1 4/1 5/1 Horizon/Horizon 2/Optima Horizon/Horizon 2/Optima Horizon/Horizon 2/Optima Horizon/Horizon 2/Optima 230/0.6 230/0.9 230/1.2 230/1.2 0.6 0.9 1.2 1.5 Gantry lamp modules can be equipped with either infrared or infrared & LED fitted module. Dimensions W × D × H mm 854 × 450 × 515 1,186 × 450 × 515 1,518 × 450 × 515 1,850 × 450 × 515 Product code 0164563666 0164564666 0164565666 0164566666 212 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

213

SURFACE & FRAME SPECIAL FEATURE OF THE HOT AND COLD PLATE: The hot and cold plate is also available to order without a frame and with a Dekton® surface to create an almost invisible transition to the counter (see picture). Dekton® surface: scratch resistant, heat resistant, freeze and thaw resistant, stain resistant, visually attractive. Standard colour: black Other finishes on request (in connection with a Hupfer food serving system). Website Further product details Examples HOT AND COLD PLATE Grey Dekton® finish Without frame Grey Dekton® counter as optional equipment HOTPLATE Black Ceran® glass surface With frame 14 213 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

214

INCOUNTER DISPENSER THE PERFECT MATCH We offer a wide range of incounter dispensers for plates, baskets, cups, etc. to make your food serving system as practical and efficient as possible. Incounter plate dispenser, unheated Model Crockery Capacity with lid/without lid Ø of worktop cut-out mm Number of stacking chutes Product code EBR-TE 19-26 Round, Ø 190- 260 mm Up to 6/70 items 385 EBR-TE 18-33 Round, Ø 180- 330 mm Up to 44/52 items 455 1 1 0161830 0162250 Stainless steel version. 3 guides per stacking chute, adjustable, polymer-coated. Installation depth: unit height to lower edge of support frame: 640 mm. Incounter plate dispenser, heated – 1 compartment Model Crockery Capacity with lid/without lid Ø of worktop cut-out mm V/kW Number of stacking chutes Product code EBR-TE/H 19-26 Round, Ø 190- 260 mm Up to 60/70 items 385 230/0.6 EBR-TE/H 18-33 Round, Ø 180- 330 mm Up to 44/52 items 455 230/0.6 1 1 0161840 0162251 Stainless steel version. 3 guides per stacking chute, adjustable, polymer-coated, incl. lid. Stainless steel tubular heating element, 70°C max. dish temperature, infinitely variable thermostat, 600 W. Installation depth: unit height to lower edge of support frame: 640 mm incl. lid. Incounter plate dispenser, heated – 2 pipes 14 Model Crockery Capacity with lid Ø of worktop cut-out mm V/kW Number of stacking chutes Product code EBR-TE/H 19-26 Round, Ø 190- 260 mm Up to 120 items 610 × 420 230/1.0 2 0161850 Stainless steel version. 3 guides per stacking chute, adjustable, polymer-coated, incl. lids. Stainless steel tubular heating element, 70°C max. dish temperature, infinitely variable thermostat, 1,000 W. Installation depth: unit height to lower edge of support frame: 640 mm. 214 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

215

Incounter crockery dispenser, unheated Model Crockery Capacity with lid/without lid Ø of worktop cut-out mm Number of stacking chutes Product code EBR-TAS 70-120 For round cups, glasses and mugs Ø 70-120 mm Up to 64/72 items 385 EBR-TAS 100- 150 For round cups, glasses and mugs Ø 100-150 mm Up to 98/104 items 455 3 to 8 (depending on the crockery diameter) 3 to 8 (depending on the crockery diameter) 0162541 0162540 Stainless steel version. 3 guides per stacking chute, adjustable, polymer-coated. Installation depth: unit height to lower edge of support frame: 640 mm. Incounter crockery dispenser, heated Model Crockery Capacity with lid/without lid Ø of worktop cut-out mm V/kW Number of stacking chutes Product code EBR-TAS/H 70-120 For round cups, glasses and mugs Ø 70-120 mm EBR-TAS/H 100-150 For round cups, glasses and mugs Ø 100-150 mm Up to 64/72 items 230/0.6 230/0.6 Up to 98/104 items 230/0.6 230/0.6 3 to 8 (depending on the crockery diameter) 3 to 8 (depending on the crockery diameter) 0162543 0162542 Stainless steel version. 3 guides per stacking chute, adjustable, polymer-coated. Stainless steel tubular heating element, 70°C max. dish temperature, infinitely variable thermostat, 600 W. Installation depth: unit height to lower edge of support frame: 640 mm. Incounter basket dispenser, unheated Model Crockery Capacity Ø of worktop cut-out mm Instal- lation Number of stacking chutes Product code EBS-KO 50-50 EBST-KO 50-50 Small items that are 1 fixed container + 4 loose containers (115 mm high)/ difficult to stack 1 fixed container + 6 loose containers (75 mm high) 526 × 526 From below 610 × 566 From above 1 1 0118179 0119559 Stainless steel version. For holding crockery baskets 500 × 500 mm*. Installation depth: unit height to lower edge of unit frame: 640 mm, can be extended to max. 665 mm by means of screw feet. * Crockery baskets can be found on p. 237. 14 215 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

216

INCOUNTER DISPENSER Incounter basket dispenser, heated Model Capacity Ø of worktop cut-out mm V/kW Instal- lation Number of stacking chutes Product code EBS-KO/H 50-50 EBST-KO/H 50-50 1 fixed container + 4 loose containers (115 mm high)/ 1 fixed container + 6 loose containers (75 mm high) 526 × 526 230/2.0 630 × 630 230/2.0 From below From above 1 1 0116153 0162256 Stainless steel version. For holding crockery baskets 500 × 500 mm*, in which small or hard-to-stack crockery can be provided. Stainless steel tubular heating element, 70°C max. dish temperature, infinitely variable thermostat, 600 W, incl. lid. Installation depth: unit height to lower edge of unit frame: 640 mm. Incounter tray dispenser, unheated Model Trays Capacity Ø of worktop cut-out mm Number of stacking chutes Product code EBST-TAB 53-37 1 stack of EN trays 530 × 370 mm or GN trays 530 × 325 mm Approx. 100 EN/GN trays 630 × 430 1 0119549 Stainless steel version. For holding trays. Stainless steel tubular heating element, 70°C max. dish temperature, infinitely variable thermostat, 600 W. Installation depth: unit height to lower edge of unit frame: 640 mm*. Installation possible both from above and below. Incounter universal dispenser, heated Model Trays Capacity with lid/without lid Ø of worktop cut-out mm V/kW Number of stacking chutes Product code EBS-UST/H 57-28 For round and rectangular plates up to Ø 280 mm; also Up to 435/555 items 585 × 295 230/1.0 suitable for small items Up to 21 depending on crockery size 0163006 Stainless steel version. Centring device with 16 slots for stainless steel guide rods. Stainless steel tubular heating element, 60°C max. dish tempera- ture in 150 min., infinitely variable thermostat, 1,000 W, incl. lid. Installation depth: unit height to top edge of cover plate: 640 mm, can be extended to max. 740 mm by means of screw feet. 14 * Crockery baskets can be found on p. 237. 216 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

217

TRAK SYSTEMS: OUR FOOD-SERVING SPECIALIST Website Further product details Teamwork for your perfect food service Hupfer and Trak: two strong partners of the Hupfer Group, who together implement food serving systems as a complete solution for you. Hupfer provides the individual serving appliances and Trak contributes its specialist knowledge in plant construction with a very wide range of materials. Two partners, one goal: simple all-round service with just one point of contact, guaranteeing perfect presentation of your food. THE ADVANTAGES AT A GLANCE Expertise We develop our products and solutions based on a deep understanding of the logistical struc- tures and individual requirements of our customers and their working environments. Planning With the help of state-of-the-art drawing programs, we give you a 3D-presentation of the results before implementation. Production At Hupfer, craftsmanship and technology work hand in hand: from our in-house carpentry workshop to varnishing. Our long-standing and qualified employees ensure a perfect result that will inspire you and your guests. Exhibition High-quality materials and workmanship must be seen and felt. For us, it therefore goes without saying that we have on-site sampling and factory acceptance at Trak in England. 14 217 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

219

ERGOMULTIPOINT Serving station ErgoMultiPoint Particularly suitable for quick serving in the à la carte business. The ErgoMultiPoint means you can have everything at hand – from prepared dishes to knives and even herbs for the final garnish. Interested? Please contact us for detailed information and comprehensive advice and to discuss any integration into a food serving counter. Image shows optional equipment. Serving station ErgoMultiPoint Everything ready to hand Here, for example, GN containers of many different sizes can be filled with sauces and herbs. Height-adjustable An ergonomic working height is crucial for healthy, happy staff. Thanks to electro- hydraulic height adjustment, this can be achieved quickly and easily. Direct connection Appliances such as mixers and hand blenders can all be connected directly to the ErgoMultiPoint. Hot or cold The right-hand cabinet can be heated or cooled with eutectic plates, as needed. Hygienic We use stainless steel, which is easy to clean and hygienic in the long term. Model Construction Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code EMP 1450/ 750/855-1155 Closed, double-walled, three-part 220 1,450 × 720 × 850 – 1,150 0163193 1515 Electrical height adjustment Capacity kW 7.5 Supply voltage Rated current Protection class 230 V AC 50 Hz A 16 IPX 4 Stainless steel version. Excluding top frame and container. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 219 219

220

WORK TABLES High-quality stainless steel work tables in a hygienic design with optional hydraulic height adjust- ment system for ergonomic adaptation to users of different heights. Durable High maximum load thanks to struts in the base. Safe No sharp edges. Ready to go Delivered ready for installation. Hygienic Fully welded design. Height-adjustable For ergonomic working. Mobile Also available in mobile version. Work tables – open – not height-adjustable Model Mobile design Maximum load 15 AT-12-O AT-14-O AT-16-O AT-18-O AT-20-O On request kg 300 300 300 300 300 Dimensions W × D × H mm 1,200 × 750 × 900 1,400 × 750 × 900 1,600 × 750 × 900 1,800 × 750 × 900 2,000 × 750 × 900 Product code 0164605 0164606 0164607 0164608 0164609 Stainless steel version. Mobile version available on request with 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. 220 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

221

Work tables with base shelf – not height-adjustable Model Mobile design Maximum load AT-12-ZB AT-14-ZB AT-16-ZB AT-18-ZB AT-20-ZB On request kg 300 300 300 300 300 Dimensions W × D × H mm 1,200 × 750 × 900 1,400 × 750 × 900 1,600 × 750 × 900 1,800 × 750 × 900 2,000 × 750 × 900 Product code 0164610 0164611 0164612 0164613 0164614 Stainless steel version. Mobile version available on request with 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Work tables – open – electrically height-adjustable Model Mobile design Maximum load AT-12-O-EH AT-14-O-EH AT-16-O-EH AT-18-O-EH AT-20-O-EH Electrical height adjustment On request Capacity kW 2.4 Dimensions W × D × H mm 1,200 × 750 × 850-1,150 1,400 × 750 × 850-1,150 1,600 × 750 × 850-1,150 1,800 × 750 × 850-1,150 2,000 × 750 × 850-1,150 Product code 0164615 0164616 0164617 0164618 0164619 Supply voltage Rated current Protection class 230 V AC 50 Hz A 1.04 IPX 4 kg 300 300 300 300 300 kg 300 300 300 300 300 Stainless steel version. Mobile version available on request with 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Work tables with base shelf – electrically height-adjustable Model Mobile design Maximum load AT-12-O-EH AT-14-O-EH AT-16-O-EH AT-18-O-EH AT-20-O-EH Electrical height adjustment On request Capacity kW 2.4 Dimensions W × D × H mm 1,200 × 750 × 850-1,150 1,400 × 750 × 850-1,150 1,600 × 750 × 850-1,150 1,800 × 750 × 850-1,150 2,000 × 750 × 850-1,150 Product code 0164620 0164621 0164622 0164623 0164624 Supply voltage Rated current Protection class 230 V AC 50 Hz A 1.04 IPX 4 Stainless steel version. Mobile version available on request with 4 swivel castors, Ø 125 mm, 2 of which have total brakes. Other wheel variants are available on page 99. Mobile preparation table Model Suitable for Operation Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 15 AT 1450/ 600/1000 F 2 mobile bain maries From the side 1,450 × 600 × 1,000 0164493 Stainless steel version. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 221

222

USEFUL ADDITIONS: DRAWERS AND CABINETS Drawer blocks and hinged-door cupboards are ideal for storing cutting boards, knives, pots, ladles, GN containers, etc. Options Handles Recessed handle: no protruding contours. Bow-shaped handle. Door stop Left or right (optional). Base shelf for hinge-door cabinet With base shelf (max. 2 pieces on shelving bolts). Without shelving bolts. Lockable Drawer block: top drawer only or all drawers lockable. Hinged-door cabinet: door lockable. Handles Recessed handle: no protruding contours. Bow-shaped handle. Drawers CNS telescopic fully extending drawer. With self-closing mechanism on request. Drawer block Box drawer. Framed drawer (for GN 1/1). Drawer block 15 Stainless steel version. 222 Width optional mm 402 (GN-1/1 lengthwise)/450 402 (GN-1/1 lengthwise)/450 402 (GN-1/1 lengthwise)/450 402 (GN-1/1 lengthwise)/450 402 (GN-1/1 lengthwise)/450 Depth mm Height mm 594 594 594 594 594 202 351 451 501 551 Drawer configuration mm 1 × 100 2 × 100 2 × 150 3 × 100 2 × 200 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

225

HYGIENE RANGE Soap dispenser for interchangeable bottle – lockable Model Capacity litres (approx.) Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code Soap dispenser/ K TC1-13 Soap dispenser TC1-01 Stainless steel version. With vision panel. Towel dispenser – lockable Model Towel dispenser TC1-14 Towel dispenser TC1-03 0.5 1.0 71 × 109 × 301 8600004 76 × 120 × 298 8600025 Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 300 × 126 × 308 8600006 298 × 120 × 298 8600022 Stainless steel version. With vision panel. Opens using deadbolt lock. Waste paper basket Model Capacity litres (approx.) Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code Waste paper basket TC1-11 Approx. 38 340 × 265 × 425 8600029 Electro-polished, stainless steel version. Free-standing or attachable. All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 16 225

226

Universal holder for pump bottles – manual height adjustment Packaging unit Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 12 units 198 × 120 × 238 8600138 Stainless steel version. For wall mounting. Universally applicable for pump bottles, e.g. disinfectant or soap dispensers in commercially available shapes and sizes. Contactless operation. Soap/disinfectant dispenser Model Capacity in litres Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code SDMS Type I-1000 1 99 × 195 × 305 8600129 Stainless steel version. Soap dispenser can be operated without hand contact. Freely fillable with liquid soap, washing lotion or disinfectant. Fill level indicator in the user’s field of vision. Hand wash basin Model Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code Hand wash basin EWB 400/310/560 400 × 310 × 560 8200342 Stainless steel version. Knee operation, with rear panel. Including fitting. Lavatory basin for wall mounting. 16 226 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

228

17 – COMMERCIAL KITCHEN ACCESSORIES Website Further product details Logistics down to the smallest detail As kitchen logistics specialists, we strive to offer you a range that covers each detail – all from a single source. We therefore also offer an extensive range of accessories to complement our Hupfer appliances. P. 229 Gastronorm containers We offer a wide variety of formats, heights and handle variations for the greatest possible flexibility. P. 236 P. 237 P. 239 Gastronorm grids Crockery baskets Various accessories The number and diameter of the wires make our grids particularly stable. Our sturdy, durable crockery baskets fit perfectly with our basket dispensers. This is what we mean by kitchen logistics down to the last detail: a wide range of small kitchen aids to complete our range. 17 228

229

GASTRONORM CONTAINERS Containers with handles at the top Model Product code — — — BGN 2/1-100 O 0130572H BGN 2/1-150 O 0130582H BGN 2/1-200 O 0130592H Containers with handles at the top Model Product code Containers with drop handles Model Product code — — — BGN 1/1-65 O 0130662H BGN 1/1-100 O 0130672H BGN 1/1-150 O 0130682H BGN 1/1-200 O 0130692H — — — BGN 1/1-65 F 0130622HF BGN 1/1-100 F 0130632HF BGN 1/1-150 F 0130642HF BGN 1/1-200 F 0130652HF Gastronorm container 2/1 Model Height mm BGN 2/1 20 40 65 100 150 200 Stainless steel version. Gastronorm container 1/1 Model Height mm BGN 1/1 20 40 55 65 100 150 200 Stainless steel version. Dimensions Containers without handles W × D mm 650 × 530 Model Product code BGN 2/1-20 0130502H BGN 2/1-40 0130512H BGN 2/1-65 0130522H BGN 2/1-100 0130532H BGN 2/1-150 0130542H BGN 2/1-200 0130552H Dimensions Containers without handles W × D mm 530 × 325 Model Product code BGN 1/1-20 0130602H BGN 1/1-40 0130612H BGN 1/1-55 0132792H BGN 1/1-65 0130622H BGN 1/1-100 0130632H BGN 1/1-150 0130642H BGN 1/1-200 0130652H All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 229 229 17

230

Gastronorm container 2/3 Model Height mm BGN 2/3 20 40 65 100 150 200 Stainless steel version. Gastronorm container 2/4 Model Height mm BGN 2/4 20 40 65 100 150 Stainless steel version. Dimensions Containers without handles W × D mm 354 × 325 Model Product code BGN 2/3-20 0131202H BGN 2/3-40 0131212H BGN 2/3-65 0131222H BGN 2/3-100 0131232H BGN 2/3-150 0131242H BGN 2/3-200 0131252H Dimensions Containers without handles W × D mm 530 × 162 Model Product code BGN 2/4-20 0130902H BGN 2/4-40 0130912H BGN 2/4-65 0130922H BGN 2/4-100 0130932H BGN 2/4-150 0130942H Containers with handles at the top Model Product code — — — — BGN 2/3-150 O 0131182H — Containers with handles at the top Model Product code — — — — BGN 2/4-150 O 0130972H Containers with drop handles Model Product code — — BGN 2/3-65 F 0131222HF BGN 2/3-100 F 0131232HF BGN 2/3-150 F 0131242HF BGN 2/3-200 F 0131252HF Containers with drop handles Model Product code — — BGN 2/4-65 F 0130922HF — BGN 2/4-150 F 0130942HF 230 17 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

231

Gastronorm container 1/2 Model Height mm BGN 1/2 20 40 55 65 100 150 200 Dimensions Containers without handles W × D mm 325 × 265 Model Product code BGN 1/2-20 0130752H BGN 1/2-40 0130762H BGN 1/2-55 0132802H BGN 1/2-65 0130772H BGN 1/2-100 0130782H BGN 1/2-150 0130792H BGN 1/2-200 0130802H Stainless steel version. Gastronorm container 1/3 Model Height mm Dimensions W × D mm Containers without handles Model Product code BGN 1/3 20 40 65 100 150 200 325 × 176 BGN 1/3-20 0131352H BGN 1/3-40 0131362H BGN 1/3-65 0131372H BGN 1/3-100 0131382H BGN 1/3-150 0131392H BGN 1/3-200 0131402H Stainless steel version. Containers with handles at the top Model Product code Containers with drop handles Model Product code — — — — — BGN 1/2-150 O 0130832H BGN 1/2-200 O 0130842H Containers with handles at the top Model Product code — — — — BGN 1/3-150 O 0131432H BGN 1/3-200 O 0131442H — — — BGN 1/2-65 F 0130772HF BGN 1/2-100 F 0130782HF BGN 1/2-150 F 0130792HF BGN 1/2-200 F 0130802HF Containers with drop handles Model Product code — — BGN 1/3-65 F 0131372HF BGN 1/3-100 F 0131382HF BGN 1/3-150 F 0131392HF BGN 1/3-200 F 0131402HF All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 231 17

232

Gastronorm container 1/4 Model BGN 1/4 Height mm 40 65 100 150 200 Stainless steel version. Gastronorm container 1/6 Model Depth mm BGN 1/6 65 100 150 200 Stainless steel version. Gastronorm container 1/9 Model BGN 1/9 Height mm 65 100 Stainless steel version. Containers with handles at the top Model Product code — — — BGN 1/4-150 O 0131082H — Containers with drop handles Model Product code — BGN 1/4-65 F 0131022HF BGN 1/4-100 F 0131032HF BGN 1/4-150 F 0131042HF BGN 1/4-200 F 0131052HF Containers with handles at the top Model Product code Containers with drop handles Model Product code — — BGN 1/6-100 O 0131552H — BGN 1/6-200 O 0131572H BGN 1/6-100 F 0131512HF BGN 1/6-150 F 0131522HF BGN 1/6-200 F 0131532HF Dimensions Containers without handles W × D mm 265 × 162 Model Product code BGN 1/4-40 0133422H BGN 1/4-65 0131022H BGN 1/4-100 0131032H BGN 1/4-150 0131042H BGN 1/4-200 0131052H Dimensions Containers without handles W × D mm 176 × 162 Model Product code BGN 1/6-65 0131502H BGN 1/6-100 0131512H BGN 1/6-150 0131522H BGN 1/6-200 0131532H Dimensions Containers without handles W × D mm 176 × 108 Model Product code BGN 1/9-65 0131622H BGN 1/9-100 0131632H 232 17 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

233

GASTRONORM CONTAINER, PERFORATED Gastronorm containers 2/1 – perforated Model Height mm BGN 2/1 65 100 150 200 Stainless steel version. Dimensions Containers without handles W × D mm 650 × 530 Model Product code BGN 2/1-65 P 0132902H BGN 2/1-100 P 0132912H BGN 2/1-150 P 0132922H BGN 2/1-200 P 0132932H Gastronorm containers 1/1 – perforated Model Height mm BGN 1/1 65 100 150 200 Stainless steel version. Dimensions Containers without handles W × D mm 530 × 325 Model Product code BGN 1/1-65 P 0132572H BGN 1/1-100 P 0132582H BGN 1/1-150 P 0132592H BGN 1/1-200 P 0132602H Gastronorm containers 2/3 – perforated Model Height mm BGN 2/3 65 100 150 200 Stainless steel version. Dimensions Containers without handles W × D mm 354 × 325 Model Product code BGN 2/3-65 P 0132942H BGN 2/3-100 P 0132952H BGN 2/3-150 P 0132962H BGN 2/3-200 P 0132972H Containers with drop handles Model Product code BGN 1/1-65 PF 0132572HF BGN 1/1-100 PF 0132582HF — BGN 1/1-200 PF 0132602HF Containers with drop handles Model Product code — — BGN 2/3-150 PF 0132962HF — Containers with hinged handles Model Product code — BGN 1/1-100 PK 0132582HK BGN 1/1-150 PK 0132592HK BGN 1/1-200 PK 0132602HK Containers with hinged handles Model Product code — BGN 2/3-100 PK 0132952HK — BGN 2/3-200 PK 0132972HK All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 233 17

234

Gastronorm containers 1/2 – perforated Model Height mm BGN 1/2 65 100 150 200 Stainless steel version. Dimensions Containers without handles W × D mm 325 × 265 Model Product code BGN 1/2-65 P 0132612H BGN 1/2-100 P 0132622H BGN 1/2-150 P 0132632H BGN 1/2-200 P 0132642H Containers with drop handles Model Product code BGN 1/2-65 PF 0132612HF — BGN 1/2-150 PF 0132632HF BGN 1/2-200 PF 0132642HF Containers with hinged handles Model Product code — BGN 1/2-100 PK 0132622HK — BGN 1/2-200 PK 0132642HK Gastronorm container 1/3 – only floor perforated Model BGN 1/3 Height mm 40 65 Stainless steel version. Dimensions Containers without handles W × D mm 325 × 175 Model Product code BGN 1/3-40 P 0133002H BGN 1/3-65 P 0133012H 234 17 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

235

ACCESSORIES: GASTRONORM CONTAINERS GN container lid Model BGD 1/1 BGD 2/3 BGD 2/4 BGD 1/2 BGD 1/3 BGD 1/4 BGD 1/6 BGD 1/9 BGD 1/1 OF BGD 2/3 OF BGD 2/4 OF BGD 1/2 OF BGD 1/3 OF BGD 1/4 OF BGD 1/6 OF Stainless steel version. Lid for GN containers with seal Model BGD 1/1 ISO BGD 2/3 ISO BGD 1/2 ISO BGD 1/3 ISO BGD 1/4 ISO BGD 1/6 ISO For containers without handles For containers with handles For container size GN container 1/1 GN container 2/3 GN container 1/2 GN container 1/3 GN container 1/4 GN container 1/6 Stainless steel version. Suitable for all GN container designs (without handle, with handles, etc.). Perforated base plate for GN containers Model BG-ELB 1/2 BG-ELB 1/3 Stainless steel version. GN container divider bar Model BG-SB-325 16.5 BG-SB-325 20.5 BG-SB-530 23.5 Stainless steel version. For container size Container GN 1/2 Container GN 1/3 Dimensions W × D × H mm 325 × 16 × 15 325 × 21 × 15 530 × 24 × 15 Product code 0131642H 0131692H 0131842H 0131652H 0131702H 0131672H 0131712H 0131722H 0131732HD 0131742HD 0131772HD 0131782HD 0131792HD 0131752HD 0131802HD Product code 0132252HD 0132272HD 0132292HD 0132312HD 0132332HD 0132352HD Product code 0132532HB 0132562HB Product code 0132502H 0132522H 0132512H All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 235 17

236

GASTRONORM GRIDS GN-grid 1/1 – Type A Model Wire thickness of frame and struts Thickness of Number of lengthwise wires lengthwise wires mm 6.0 mm 3.0 GN 1/1 0 3 5 325 Electro-polished, stainless steel version with brushed edges. Dimensions W × D mm Product code 20 530 × 325 01139029 GN-grid 1/1 – Type B Model Wire thickness of frame and struts Thickness of Number of lengthwise wires lengthwise wires mm 7.0 mm 3.0 GN 1/1 0 3 5 325 Electro-polished, stainless steel version with brushed edges. Dimensions W × D mm Product code 17 530 × 325 7209535 GN-grid 2/1 – Type A Model Wire thickness of frame and struts Thickness of Number of lengthwise wires lengthwise wires mm 7.0 mm 3.0 GN 2/1 0 5 6 530 Electro-polished, stainless steel version with brushed edges. Dimensions W × D mm Product code 35 650 × 530 01139129 236 17 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

237

CROCKERY BASKETS Coated crockery basket Model Mesh size mm Wire thickness mm Basket frame Basket base and walls Dimensions W × D × H* mm Product code Crockery basket//coat- ed 650/530/75 Crockery basket//coat- ed 650/530/115 25 × 43 25 × 43 5.0 5.0 2.5 2.5 650 × 530 × 93 0117002 650 × 530 × 133 0117012 Grey, polymer-coated stainless steel version. Robust, fully welded construction. Washing device safe. Self-alignment of baskets when stacking thanks to special corners integrated into the basket frame. Coated crockery basket Model Mesh size mm Wire thickness mm Basket frame Basket base and walls Dimensions W × D × H* mm Product code Crockery basket//coat- ed 500/500/75 Crockery basket//coat- ed 500/500/115 25 × 45 25 × 45 5.0 5.0 2.5 2.5 500 × 500 × 93 0116982 500 × 500 × 133 0116992 Grey, polymer-coated stainless steel version. Robust, fully welded construction. Washing device safe. Self-alignment of baskets when stacking thanks to special corners integrated into the basket frame. Crockery basket Model Mesh size mm Wire thickness mm Basket frame Basket base and walls Dimensions W × D × H* mm Product code Crockery basket 650/530/75 27 × 27 Crockery basket 650/530/115 27 × 27 5.0 5.0 2.5 650 × 530 × 93 0113822 2.5 650 × 530 × 133 0113832 Stainless steel, electro-polished, looped version. Self-alignment of baskets when stacking thanks to special corners integrated into the basket frame. Crockery basket Model Mesh size mm Wire thickness mm Basket frame Basket base and walls Dimensions W × D × H* mm Product code Crockery basket 500/500/75 27 × 27 Crockery basket 500/500/115 27 × 27 5.0 5.0 2.5 500 × 500 × 93 0113812 2.5 500 × 500 × 133 0115332 Stainless steel, electro-polished, looped version. Self-alignment of baskets when stacking thanks to special corners integrated into the basket frame. *incl. Stacking corner All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 237 17

238

Loading basket Model Mesh size mm Wire thickness mm Basket frame Basket base and walls Loading basket/coat- ed 530/325/70 Loading basket/coat- ed 530/370/108 gr 26 × 26 26 × 26 5.0 5.0 2.5 2.5 Dimensions W × D × H mm 530 × 325 × 70 (GN version) 530 × 370 × 108 (EN version) Product code 0118612 7215010 Silver-grey, polymer-coated stainless steel version. Temperature resistance: -50°C to +80°C (dry). Self-alignment of baskets when stacking thanks to special corners integrated into the basket frame. 238 17 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

239

Cutting board holder Model Board capacity Max. board thickness Cutting board holder 202/340/270 – 6 × 25 Cutting board holder 505/340/270 – 10 × 40 6 10 Electro-polished, stainless steel version. Including 4 polymer foot caps. mm 25 40 Hose holder – wire version Model Hose holder 352/162/185 mm, wire Electro-polished, stainless steel version. Hose holder – solid version Model Hose holder solid 400 × 150 × 300 mm Electro-polished, stainless steel version. With four bore holes Ø 8.5 mm. VARIOUS ACCESSORIES Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 202 × 340 × 270 7212536 505 × 340 × 270 7212526 Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 352 × 162 × 185 7212095 Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code 400 × 154 × 300 0122752 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/ 239 17

240

Round mobile container Model Capacity in litres Number of handles Chassis Maximum load kg Dimensions W × D × H mm Product code BHR 50L 50 BHR 50L SF 50 BHR 65L SF 65 2 2 3 Fixed 50 Ø 412 × 518 × 557 0124683 Separate 50 505 × 421 × 501 0124685 Separate 65 Ø 520 × 500 × 630 0124689 Stainless steel version. Round mobile container incl. lid. Product code 0124683 and 0124685: 4 swivel castors, Ø 75 mm, in corrosion-resistant hous- ings, polymer wheel with plain bearing. Product code 0124689: 4 swivel castors, Ø 50 mm, in corrosion-resistant housings, with plain bearing. 240240 17 All data/dimensions are approximate, and we reserve the right to make technical changes. · As of: 1 September 2021 · For further details, models, prices and accessories, please visit: uk.hupfer.com/en/

OUR RANGE

SHELVING SYSTEMS

TRANSPORT TROLLEYS

EURO CONTAINER LOGISTICS

STACKING DEVICES

MOBILE BAIN MARIE

FOOD TRANSPORT TROLLEY

ISOBOX® FOOD TRANSPORT TROLLEY

MOBIS® BUFFETCARTS

KÖHLER® BANQUET TROLLEYS

TRAY TRANSPORT CART

FOOD DISTRIBUTION

FOOD DISTRIBUTION WITH CONVEYOR TECHNOLOGY

CONVEYOR TECHNOLOGY

BUILT-IN APPLIANCES FOR FOOD SERVING COUNTERS

FURNITURE AND FIXTURES

HYGIENE RANGE

COMMERCIAL KITCHEN ACCESSORIES